FACULTY OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY

CURRICULUM, PRE-REQUISITES/ CO-REQUISITES

CHART AND SYLLABUS FOR B.TECH
UNDER CHOICE BASED FLEXIBLE CREDIT SYSTEM

REGULATIONS 2015
(For students admitted from 2015-16 onwards)

Specialization : Automotive Electronics

Offering Department : Department of Automobile Engineering

Placed in the 36th Academic Council Meeting held on October 2017

 CONTENTS

COURSE PAGE
TOPIC / COURSE TITLE
CODE NUMBER
STUDENT OUTCOMES II
C-D-I-O III
ABBREVIATIONS IV
CURRICULUM – CORE COURSES IN SPREAD V
SHEET VII
CURRICULUM – ELECTIVE COURSES IN SPREAD VIII
SHEET XI
CURRICULUM – CORE COURSES XII
CURRICULUM – ELECTIVE COURSES XIII
SUMMARY OF CREDITS XIV
PRE/CO REQUISITES FLOW CHART – CORE XV
COURSES XVII
PRE/CO REQUISITES FLOW CHART – ELECTIVE
COURSES
PRE/CO REQUISITES LIST
PRE/CO REQUISITES ELECTIVE COURSES LIST
YEAR – 1, SEMESTER - I
15PD101 SOFT SKILLS - I 1
15MA101 CALCULUS AND SOLID GEORMETRY 3
15ME105L ENGINEERING GRAPHICS 6
YEAR – I, SEMESTER – II
15PD102 SOFT SKILLS - II 12
15MA102 ADVANCED CLACULUS AND COMPLED ANALYSIS 14
15ME101 BASIC MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 17
15ME102 ENGINEERING MECHANICS 20
15ME104L WORKSHOP PRACTICE 24
15AE102L AUTOMOTIVE BASIC SCIENCE LABORATORY 26
YEAR – II, SEMESTER – I
15PD201 QUANITATIVE APTITUDE & LOGICAL REASONING – 29
I
15MA202 FOURIER SERIES, PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL 31
EQUATIONS AND IT’S APPLICATIONS
15ME201 THERMODYNAMICS 35
15ME204 MACHINES AND MECHANISMS 38
15ME205 FLUID MECHANICS 41
COURSE PAGE
TOPIC / COURSE TITLE
CODE NUMBER
15AE201J MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY FOR 45
AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING
15AE208 ANALOG AND DIGITAL CIRCUITS FOR 49
AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATION
15ME205L FLUID DYNAMICS LABORATORY 52
15AE203L AUTOMOTIVE COMPONENTS AND ASSEMBLY 53
DRAWING
YEAR – II SEMESTER – II
15PD202 VERBAL APTITUDE 57
15MA206 NUMERICAL METHODS 59
15AE204 APPLIED THERMAL ENGINEERING FOR 63
AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS
15AE209 AUTOMOTIVE CONTROL ENGINEERING 66
15ME203 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS 70
15ME303 MATERIALS TECHNOLOGY 74
15ME203L STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORATORY 79
15ME303L MATERIALS TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY 80
15AE375L/ MINOR PROJECT I/ 82
15AE380L/ SEMINAR I/ 85
15AE385L/ MASSIVE OPEN ONLINE COURSES (MOOCs) I/ 87
15AE490L INDUSTRIAL MODULE I/ 88
YEAR – III, SEMESTER – I
15PD301 COMMUNICATION & REASONING SKILLS 91
15MA301 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS 93
15AE310 AUTOMOTIVE TRANSDUCERS AND SIGNAL 96
CONDITIONERS
15AE311 I.C. ENGINES AND ITS SUBSYSTEMS 99
15AE312 VEHICULAR STRUCTURES AND DRIVELINE 102
SYSTEMS
15AE305L AUTOMOTIVE COMPONENTS LABORATORY 106
15AE310L AUTOMOTIVE TRANDUCERS AND SIGNAL 108
CONDITIONERS LABORATORY
15AE314L ENGINE AND VEHICLE TESTING LABORATORY 110
15AE390L INDUSTRIAL TRANING I (TO BE DONE AFTER IV 111
SEM)
YEAR – III, SEMESTER – II
15PD302 APTITUDE IV 114
15AE301 DESIGN OF AUTOMOTIVE COMPONENTS 116
COURSE PAGE
TOPIC / COURSE TITLE
CODE NUMBER
15ME304 FLUID POWER CONTROL 119
15AE307J AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS 124
SYSTEM
15AE313 AUTOMOTIVE MICROCONTROLLERS 128
15AE313L AUTOMOTIVE MICROCONTROLLERS 131
LABORATORY
15AE376L/ MINOR PROJECT II/ 133
15AE381L/ SEMINAR II / 135
15AE386L/ MASSIVE OPEN ONLINE COURSES (MOOCS) II/ 138
15AE491L INDUSTRIAL MODULE II 139
YEAR – IV, SEMESTER – I
15AE401 VEHICLE DYNAMICS 142
15AE402 VEHICLE BODY ENGINEERING AND 144
AERODYNAMICS
15AE406 MODELLING AND CONTROL OF ELECTRIC AND 147
HYBRID VEHICLES
15AE404M MULTI-DISCIPLINARY DESIGN 150
15AE401L VEHICLE DYNAMICS LABORATORY 153
15AE406L ELECTRIC VEHICULAR SYSTEMS LABORATORY 154
15AE391L INDUSTRIAL TRAINING II (TO BE DONE AFTER VI 156
SEM)
YEAR – IV, SEMESTER - II
15AE496L MAJOR PROJECT 158
ELECTIVE COURSES
DEPARTMENT ELECTIVE I ( TO BE OFFERED IN II
SEMESTER OF II YEAR)
15AE253E PRINCIPLES OF LINEAR SYSTEMS AND SIGNALS 162
POWER ELECTRONICS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLE 165
15AE254E
APPLICATION
DEPARTMENT ELECTIVE II ( TO BE OFFERED IN I
AND II SEMESTER OF III YEAR )
15AE351E AUTOMOTIVE FAULT DIAGNOSTICS 168
15AE352E AUTOMOTIVE COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS 171
ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY 174
15AE353E
LOGIC
STATE SPACE ANALYSIS AND DIGITAL CONTROL 176
15AE355E
SYSTEM
15AE356E AUTOMOTIVE DEVELOPMENT PROCESS 180
COURSE PAGE
TOPIC / COURSE TITLE
CODE NUMBER
DEPARTMENT ELECTIVE V AND VI
( TO BE OFFERED IN I SEMESTER OF IV YEAR )
15AE451E INTELLIGENT VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY 183
15AE452E MODEL BASED SYSTEM DESIGN 186
15AE453E VEHICLE STABILITY AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 189
15AE454E NONLINEAR SYSTEMS 193
15AE455E ENGINEERING OPTIMIZATION 195
 STUDENT OUTCOMES

The curriculum and syllabus for B.Tech programs (2013) conform to outcome based
teaching learning process. In general, ELEVEN STUDENT OUTCOMES (a-k) have
been identified and the curriculum and syllabus have been structured in such a way
that each of the courses meets one or more of these outcomes. Student outcomes
describe what students are expected to know and be able to do by the time of
graduation. These relate to the skills, knowledge, and behaviors that students acquire
as they progress through the program. Further each course in the program spells out
clear instructional objectives which are mapped to the student outcomes.
The student outcomes are:
(a) an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering
(b) an ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze and
interpret data
(c) an ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs
within realistic constraints such as economic, environmental, social, political,
ethical, health and safety, manufacturability, and sustainability
(d) an ability to function on multidisciplinary teams
(e) an ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems
(f) an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility
(g) an ability to communicate effectively
(h) the broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering
solutions in global, economic, environmental, and societal context
(i) a recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in life-long
learning
(j) a knowledge of contemporary issues
(k) an ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools
necessary for engineering practice.

ii B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 C-D-I-O INITIATIVE

The CDIO Initiative (CDIO is a trademarked initialism for Conceive — Design —

Implement — Operate) is an innovative educational framework for producing the next
generation of engineers. The framework provides students with an education stressing
engineering fundamentals set in the context of Conceiving — Designing —
Implementing — Operating real-world systems and products. Throughout the world,
CDIO Initiative collaborators have adopted CDIO as the framework of their curricular
planning and outcome-based assessment.
In the syllabus, every topic has been classified under one or more of C-D-I-O so that
students and faculty alike are clear about the scope of learning to take place under
each one of the topics.

iii B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

AR -- Architecture Courses
B -- Courses under Basic Science and Mathematics
BT -- Biotechnology Courses
C-D-I-O -- Conceive-Design-Implement-Operate
CE -- Civil Engineering Courses
CS -- Computer Science and Engineering Courses
CY -- Chemistry Courses
Dept. -- Department of Civil Engineering
E with course -- Elective Courses
code
E -- Courses under Engineering Sciences
EC -- Electronics and Communication Engineering
Courses
EE -- Electrical and Electronics Engineering Courses
G -- Courses under Arts and Humanities
IOs -- Instructional Objectives
L -- Laboratory / Project / Industrial Training Courses
LE -- Language Courses
L-T-P-C -- L- Lecture Hours Per Week
T- Tutorial Hours Per Week
P- Practical Hours Per Week
C- Credits for a Course
M -- Courses with Multi Disciplinary Content
MA -- Mathematics Courses
ME -- Mechanical Engineering Courses
NC -- NCC- National Cadet Corps
NS -- NSS – National Service Scheme
P -- Professional Core Courses
PD -- Personality Development Courses
PY -- Physics Courses
SO/SOs -- Student Outcomes (a-k)
SP -- NSO- National Sports Organization
YG -- Yoga Course

iv B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY, SRM UNIVERSITY

DEPARTMENT OF AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING

B.TECH AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING (With specialization in Automotive electronics)CHOICE BASED FLEXIBLE CREDIT SYSTEM (CBFCS) Curriculum Under Regulations 2015 (For students admitted from 2015-16 onwards)

T Tutorial P Practical E Elective

L Lecture Hours / Week C Credits L Laboratory Course J Theory jointly with Lab M Course with Multidisciplinary content
Hours / Week Hours / Week Courses
Category - wise

Year 1 Year 2
% of Credits
Category

1st Semester 2nd Semester 1st Semester 2nd Semester

Course
Course Title L T P C Course Code Course Title L T P C Course Code Course Title L T P C Course Code Course Title L T P C
Code
German German
15LE101 English 2 0 0 2 15LE102 Value Education 2 0 0 2 15LE201E 15LE207E
Language-I Language-II
French French
15PD101 Soft Skills-I 1 1 0 1 15PD102 Soft Skills-II 1 1 0 1 15LE202E 15LE208E
Language-I Language-II
NCC- National Japanese Japanese
15NC101 15LE203E 15LE209E
Arts & Humanities-G

Cadet Corps Language-I 2 0 0 2 Language-II 2 0 0 2

NSS- National Korean Korean
15NS101 15LE204E 15LE210E
8.33% Service Scheme Language-I Language-II

NSO- National 0 0 1 1 Chinese Chinese

15SP101 15LE205E 15LE211E
Sports Organization Language-I Language-II

Quantitative
Aptitude &
15YG101 Yoga 15PD201 1 1 0 1 15PD202 Verbal Aptitude 1 1 0 1
Logical
Reasoning –I

15 Total 3 1 0 3 Total 3 1 1 4 Total 3 1 0 3 Total 3 1 0 3

Fourier Series,
Advanced Calculus
Calculus And Partial Numerical
15MA101 3 1 0 4 15MA102 And Complex 3 1 0 4 15MA202 4 0 0 4 15MA206 4 0 0 4
Solid Geometry Differential Methods
Analysis
Equations And
15PY101 Physics 3 0 0 3 15PY102L Material Science 2 0 2 3
Basic Sciences - B

19.44% Principles Of
Physics
15PY101L 0 0 2 1 15CY102 Environmental 2 0 0 2
Laboratory
Science
15CY101 Chemistry 3 0 0 3

Chemistry
15CY101L 0 0 2 1
Laboratory
Biology For
15BT101 2 0 0 2
Engineers

35 Total 11 1 4 14 Total 7 1 2 9 Total 4 0 0 4 Total 4 0 0 4

Basic Civil Basic Mechanical Thermodynamic

15CE101 2 0 0 2 15ME101 2 0 0 2 15ME201 2 2 0 3
Engineering Sciences -E

Engineering Engineering s
Basic Electrical Basic Electronics
15EE101 2 0 0 2 15EC101 2 0 0 2
Engineering Engineering
10.00%
15ME105 Engineering
1 0 4 3 15ME104L Workshop Practice 0 0 3 2
L Graphics
Programming
15CS101L 1 0 2 2
Laboratory

18 Total 6 0 6 9 Total 4 0 3 6 Total 2 2 0 3 Total 0 0 0 0

 Applied
Engineering Fluid Thermal
15ME102 3 1 0 4 15ME205 2 2 0 3 15AE204 2 2 0 3
Mechanics Mechanics Engineering for
Automotive
Manufacturing
Automotive Basic Technology for Mechanics of
15AE102L 0 0 2 1 15AE201J 3 0 2 4 15ME203 2 2 0 3
Science Laboratory Automotive Solids
Engineers

Analog, Digital
Circuits for
Professional - Core -P

40.56% 15AE208 2 1 0 2 15AE209 Automotive Control Engineering

2 2 0 3
Automotive
Applications

Automotive
Components Materials
15AE203L 0 1 3 2 15ME303 3 0 0 3
and Assembly Technology
Drawing

Materials
Fluid Dynamics
15ME205L 0 0 2 1 15ME303L Technology 0 0 2 1
Laboratory
Laboratory
Strength of
Machines and
15ME204 2 2 0 3 15ME203L Materials 0 0 2 1
Mechanisms
Laboratory

73 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 3 1 2 5 Total 9 6 7 15 Total 9 6 4 14

Department
3 0 0 3
Prof - Electives -P

Elective-I
8.33%

15 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 3 0 0 3

Minor Project I /
Project / Seminar /

Seminar I /
15AE375L /
Massive Open
Internship-P

15AE380L /
8.33% Online Courses 0 0 3 2
15AE385L /
(MOOCs) I /
15AE490L
Industrial
Module I

18 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 3 2

Open Electives

6 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 0 0

Total 180 20 2 10 26 17 3 8 24 18 9 7 25 19 7 7 26

Total contact Total Contact

Contact hours 32 Contact hours 28 34 33
hours hours
 FACULTY OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY, SRM UNIVERSITY

DEPARTMENT OF AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING

B.TECH AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING(with specialization in Automotive electronics) CHOICE BASED FLEXIBLE CREDIT SYSTEM (CBFCS) Curriculum Under Regulations 2015 (For students admitted from 2015-16 onwards)

C Credits
Lecture Hours /
L T Tutorial Hours / Week P Practical Hours L Laboratory Course E Elective Courses J Theory jointly with Lab M Course with Multidisciplinary content
Week
/ Week

Year 3 Year 4

1st Semester 2nd Semester 1st Semester 2nd Semester

Course Course Course Course

Course Title L T P C Course Title L T P C Course Code Course Title L T P C L T P C
Code Code Code Title

Quantitative
Communication &
15PD301 1 1 0 1 15PD302 Aptitude & Logical 1 1 0 1
Reasoning Skills
Reasoning –II

Total 1 1 0 1 Total 1 1 0 1 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 0 0

Probability and
15MA301 4 0 0 4
Statistics

Total 4 0 0 4 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 0 0

Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 0 0

 Automotive Design of
15AE310 Transducers and 2 0 0 2 15AE301 Automotive 2 2 0 3 15AE401 Vehicle Dynamics 2 2 0 3
signal conditioners Components

Vehicle Body
I.C Engines and its Fluid Power
15AE311 3 0 0 3 15ME304 3 0 0 3 15AE402 Engineering and 3 0 0 3
subsystems Control
Aerodynamics

Vehicular Automotive Modelling and Control

15AE312 Structures and 2 2 0 3 15AE307J Electrical & 3 0 2 4 15AE406 of Electric and Hybrid 3 0 0 3
Driveline Systems Electronic System Vehicles

Automotive
Automotive Multi-Disciplinary
15AE305L Components 0 0 2 1 15AE313 3 0 0 3 15AE404M 2 2 0 3
Microcontrollers Design
Laboratory

Automotive
Automotive
Transducers and Vehicle Dynamics
15AE310L 0 0 2 1 15AE313L Microcontrollers 0 0 2 1 15AE401L 0 0 2 1
Signal conditioners Laboratory
Laboratory
Laboratory
Engine and Vehicle Electric Vehicular
15AE314L 0 0 2 1 15AE406L 0 0 2 1
Testing Laboratory systems Laboratory

Total 7 2 6 11 Total 9 0 4 14 Total 10 4 4 14 Total 0 0 0 0

Department Department
3 0 0 3 3 0 0 3 Department Elective-IV 3 0 0 3
Elective-II Elective-III

Department Elective-V 3 0 0 3

Total 3 0 0 3 Total 3 0 0 3 Total 6 0 0 6 Total 0 0 0 0

Open Elective I 3 0 0 3 Open Elective Ii 3 0 0 3

15AE376L
Minor Project II /
Industrial Training-I / Industrial Training-II (To
Seminar II / Major
15AE390L (To be done after 0 0 2 1 15AE381L 15AE391L be done after VI 0 0 2 1 15AE496L 0 0 24 12
Massive Open Project
IV semester) / 0 0 3 2 semester)
Online Courses
15AE386L
(MOOCs) II /
/
Industrial Module II
15AE491L

Total 0 0 2 1 Total 0 0 3 2 Total 0 0 2 1 Total 0 0 24 12

Open Elective I 3 0 0 3 Open Elective II 3 0 0 3

As per list / as As per list / as
taken by the taken by the
student student
Total 3 0 0 3 Total 3 0 0 3 Total 0 0 0 0 Total 0 0 0 0

OPEN ELECTIVE
OPEN ELECTIVE I 3 0 0 3 3 0 0 3
II

18 3 8 23 16 1 7 23 16 4 6 21 0 0 24 12

Total
Total Contact Total contact
29 24 Total contact hours 26 contact 24
hours hours
hours
 B.Tech Automobile Engineering (With Specialization in Automotive Electronics)
(Applicable for Students Admitted from the Academic Year 2017-2018 Onwards)
CURRICULUM – 2015
Semester - I
Course
Category Course Name L T P C
Code
15LE101 G English 2 0 0 2
15PD101 G Soft Skills-I 1 1 0 1
15MA101 B Calculus and Solid Geometry 3 1 0 4
15PY101 B Physics 3 0 0 3
15CY101 B Chemistry 3 0 0 3
15BT101 B Biology for Engineers 2 0 0 2
15CE101 E Basic Civil Engineering 2 0 0 2
15EE101 E Basic Electrical Engineering 2 0 0 2
15PY101L B Physics Laboratory 0 0 2 1
15CY101L B Chemistry Laboratory 0 0 2 1
15ME105L E Engineering Graphics 1 0 4 3
15CS101L E Programming Laboratory 1 0 2 2
Total 20 2 10 26
Total Contact Hours 32

Semester - II
Course
Category Course Name L T P C
Code
15LE102 G Value Education 2 0 0 2
15PD102 G Soft Skills-II 1 1 0 1
15MA102 B Advanced Calculus and Complex Analysis 3 1 0 4
15PY102L B Material Science 2 0 2 3
15CY102 B Principles of Environmental Science 2 0 0 2
15ME101 E Basic Mechanical Engineering 2 0 0 2
15EC101 E Basic Electronics Engineering 2 0 0 2
15ME102 P Engineering Mechanics 3 1 0 4
15ME104L E Workshop Practice 0 0 3 2
15AE102L P Automotive Basic Science Laboratory 0 0 2 1
15NC101/
15NS101/
G *NCC /NSS/NSO/YOGA 0 0 1 1
15SP101/
15YG101
Total 17 3 8 24
Total Contact Hours 28

vi B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
*NCC – National Cadet Corps
NSS – National Service Scheme
NSO – National Sport Organization

Legend:
L - Number of lecture hours per week
T - Number of tutorial hours per week
P - Number of practical hours per week
C - Number of credits for the course

Category of courses:
G – General
B - Basic Sciences
E - Engineering Sciences and Technical Arts
P - Professional Subjects

Semester - III
Course
Category Course Name L T P C
Code
15LE201E/ German Language - I/
15LE202E/ French Language - I/
15LE203E/ G Japanese Language - I/ 2 0 0 2
15LE204E/ Korean Language -I/
15LE205E Chinese Language - I
15PD201 G Quantitative Aptitude & Logical Reasoning – I 1 1 0 1
15MA202 B Fourier Series, Partial Differential Equations and 4 0 0 4
its Applications
15ME201 E Thermodynamics 2 2 0 3
15ME204 P Machines and Mechanisms 2 2 0 3
15ME205 P Fluid Mechanics 2 2 0 3
15AE201J P Manufacturing Technology for Automotive 3 0 2 4
Engineers
15AE208 P Analog, Digital Circuits for Automotive 2 0 0 2
Applications
15AE203L P Automotive Components and Assembly Drawing 0 1 3 2
15ME205L P Fluid Dynamics Laboratory 0 0 2 1
Total 18 9 7 25
Total Contact Hours 29

vii B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Semester - IV
Course
Category Course Name L T P C
Code
15LE207E/ German Language -II/
15LE208E/ French Language -II/
15LE209E/ G Japanese Language -II/ 2 0 0 2
15LE210E/ Korean Language -II/
15LE211E Chinese Language- II
15PD202 G Verbal Aptitude 1 1 0 1
15MA206 B Numerical Methods 4 0 0 4
15AE204 P Applied Thermal Engineering for Automotive
2 2 0 3
Engineers
15ME203 P Mechanics of Solids 2 2 0 3
15ME303 P Materials Technology 3 0 0 3
15AE209 P Automotive Control Engineering 2 2 0 3
15ME203L P Strength of Materials Laboratory 0 0 2 1
15ME303L P Materials Technology Laboratory 0 0 2 1
15AE375L/ Minor Project- I/
15AE380L/ Seminar- I/
P 0 0 3 2
15AE385L/ Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs)-I/
15AE490L Industrial Module- I
P Departmental Elective – I 3 0 0 3
Total 19 7 7 26
Total Contact Hours 33

Semester - V
Course
Category Course Name L T P C
Code
15PD301 G Communication & Reasoning Skills 1 1 0 1
15MA301 B Probability and Statistics 4 0 0 4
15AE310 P Automotive Transducers and Signal Conditioners 2 0 0 2
15AE311 P I.C Engines and its Subsystems 3 0 0 3
15AE312 P Vehicular Structures and Driveline Systems 2 2 0 3
15AE314L P Engine and Vehicle Testing Laboratory 0 0 2 1
15AE305L P Automotive Components Laboratory 0 0 2 1
15AE390L P Industrial Training -I (To be done after IV
0 0 2 1
Semester)
P Department Elective-II 3 0 0 3
P Open Elective -I 3 0 0 3
Total 18 3 8 23
Total Contact Hours 29
viii B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Semester - VI
Course
Category Course Name L T P C
Code
15PD302 G Quantitative Aptitude & Logical Reasoning – II 1 1 0 1
15ME304 P Fluid Power Control 3 0 0 3
15AE301 P Design of Automotive Components 2 2 0 3
15AE307J P Automotive Electrical & Electronics System 3 0 2 4
15AE313 P Automotive Microcontrollers 3 0 0 3
15AE313L P Automotive Microcontrollers Laboratory 0 0 2 1
15AE376L/ Minor Project- II/
15AE381L/ P Seminar -II/
0 0 3 2
15AE386L/ Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs) -II/
15AE491L Industrial Module-II
P Departmental Elective – III 3 0 0 3
P Open Elective – II 3 0 0 3
Total 16 1 7 23
Total Contact Hours 24

Semester - VII
Course Code Category Course Name L T P C
15AE401 P Vehicle Dynamics 2 2 0 3
15AE402 P Vehicle Body Engineering and
3 0 0 3
Aerodynamics
15AE404M P Multi-Disciplinary Design 2 2 0 3
15AE406 P Modelling and Control of Electric and
3 0 0 3
Hybrid Vehicles
15AE401L P Vehicle Dynamics Laboratory 0 0 2 1
15AE406L P Electric Vehicular Systems Laboratory 0 0 2 1
15AE391L P Industrial Training –II (To be done after VI
0 0 2 1
Semester)
P Departmental Elective – IV 3 0 0 3
P Departmental Elective – V 3 0 0 3
Total 16 4 6 21
Total Contact Hours 26

Semester - VIII
Course Category
Course Name L T P C
Code
15AE496L P Major Project 0 0 24 12
Total 0 0 24 12
Total Hours 24
ix B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Departmental Electives

Course Categor
Course Name L T P C
Code y
15AE253E P Principles of linear systems and signals 3 0 0 3
15AE254E P Power electronics for EV application 3 0 0 3
15AE351E P Automotive Fault Diagnostics 3 0 0 3
15AE352E P Automotive Communication Protocols 3 0 0 3
15AE353E P Artificial Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic 3 0 0 3
State Space analysis and Digital Control
15AE355E P 3 0 0 3
system
15AE356E P Automotive Development process 3 0 0 3
15AE451E P Intelligent Vehicle Technology 3 0 0 3
15AE452E P Model Based System Design 3 0 0 3
15AE453E P Vehicle Stability and Control Systems 3 0 0 3
15AE454E P Nonlinear systems 3 0 0 3
15AE455E P Engineering Optimization 3 0 0 3

Note: All Core/Elective courses can be listed / delisted every semester under open
electives, based on the availability of resources and demand.

x B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Summary of Credits
Category I&II III&IV V&VI VII&VIII Total %
G 7 6 2 0 15 8.33
B 23 8 4 0 35 19.44
E 15 3 0 0 18 10
P 5 28 28 27 88 48.89
Open Elective 0 0 6 0 6 3.33
Departmental Elective 0 3 6 9 18 10
Total 50 48 46 36 180 100

xi B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 SRM UNIVERSITY
DEPARTMENT OF AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
PRE AND CO REQUISITE CHART

15MA101 4 Cr 15PD101 1 Cr 15PY101 3 Cr 15PY101L 1 Cr 15CY101L 3 Cr 15CY101L 1 Cr 15ME105L 3 Cr

SEM 1

Calculus and Physics Chemistry Engineering

Soft Skills I Physics Chemistry
Solid Geometry Laboratory Laboratory Graphics
YEAR 1

15MA102 4 Cr 15PD102 1 Cr 15ME102 4 Cr

SEM 2

Advanced Engineering
Soft Skills - II
Calculus Mechanics

15MA202 4 Cr 15PD201 1 Cr 15LE201-5E2 Cr 15ME201 3 Cr 15ME204 3 Cr 15ME205 3 Cr 15ME205L 1Cr 15AE203L 2 Cr 15AE208 2 Cr
Quantitative Automotive Analog, Digital
SEM1

Fourier Series, Partial

Aptitude & Thermo Machines and Fluid Fluid Dyanmics Components Circuits for
Difference Equations Language I
and its Applications Logical dynamics Mechanisms Mechanics Laboratory and Assembly Automotive
YEAR 2

Reasoning I Drawing Applications

15MA206 4 Cr 15PD202 1 Cr 15LE207-11E2 Cr 15AE204 3 Cr 15ME203 3 Cr 15ME203L 1 Cr 15ME303 3 Cr 15ME303L 1 Cr 15AE209 3 Cr

SEM 2

Applied Strength of Materials Automotive

Numerical Mechanics of Materials
Verbal Aptitude Language II Thermo Materials Technology Control
Methods Solids Technology
dynamics Laboratory Laboratory Engineering

15MA301 4 Cr 15PD301 1 Cr 15AE314L 1 Cr 15AE311 3 Cr 15AE312 3 Cr 15AE305L 1 Cr 15AE310L 1 Cr 15AE310 2 Cr

SEM 1

Vehicular Automotive
Communication Engine and Automotive Automotive
Probability & I.C Engines and Structrues and Transducers &
& Reasoning Vechile Testing Components Signal Conditioners
Transducers &
Statistics its Subsystems Driveline Signal Conditioners
Skills Lab Laboratory
YEAR 3

Systems Laboratory

15PD302 1 Cr 15AE301 3 Cr 15AE313L 1 Cr 15AE313 3 Cr 15AE307J 4 Cr

Quantitative Automotive
SEM 2

Design of Automotive Automotive

Aptitude & Electrical and
Automotive Microcontroller Microcontroller
Logical Electronics
components s Laboratory s
Reasoning II System

15AE401 3 Cr 15AE402 3 Cr 15AE406 3 Cr

YEAR 4

SEM 1

Modelling and
Vehicle Body
Vehicle control of Electric
Engineering and
Dynamics and Hybrid
Aerodynamics vehicles

B.Tech Automobile Engg. (Splz.in Automotive Electronics)

Xii
 SRM UNIVERSITY
DEPARTMENT OF AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
PRE AND CO REQUISITE CHART

15AE208 2 Cr 15AE209 3 Cr 15AE307J 4 Cr 15AE313 3 Cr

Analog, Digital Automotive
Automotive Automotive
Circuits for Electrical &
Control Microcontroller
Automotive Electronics
Engineering s
Applications System
15AE352E 3 Cr 15AE253E 3 Cr 15AE356E 3 Cr 15AE353E 3 Cr 15AE351E 3 Cr 15AE451E 3 Cr

Automotive Principles of Automotive Artificial Automotive Intelligent

Communication linear systems Development Neural Fault Vehicle
Protocols and signals process Networks and Diagonostics Technology
Fuzzy Logic
15AE254E 3 Cr 15AE452E 3 Cr 15AE355E 3 Cr
State Space
Power
Model Based analysis and
electronics for
System Design Digital Control
EV application
system

15AE453 3 Cr 15AE401 3 Cr
Vehicle
Stability and Vehicle
Control Dynamics
Systems

15AE454E 3 Cr 15AE406 3 Cr
Modelling and
Nonlinear Control of
systems Electric and
Hybrid Vehicles

15AE455E 3 Cr
Engineering
Optimization

B.Tech Automobile Engg. (Splz.in Automotive Electronics)

Xiii
 DEPARTMENT OF AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
B.Tech Automobile Engineering
(with Specialization in Automotive Electronics)
Course Pre- Co-
Course title
Code requisites requisites
SEMESTER - I
15PD101 Soft Skills
15MA101 Calculus And Solid Geometry
15PY101 Physics
15PY101L Physics Lab 15PY101
15CS101L Programming Lab
15CY101 Chemistry
15CY101L Chemistry Lab 15CY101
15BT101 Biology For Engineers
15EE101 Basic Electrical Engineering
15CE101 Basic Civil Engineering
SEMESTER - II
15LE101 English
15LE102 Value Education
15PD102 Soft Skills – II
15NC/NS/
NSS/NCC/Yoga/Sports
SP/YG101
Advanced Calculus And
15MA102 15MA101
Complex Analysis
15PY102 Material Science
Principles Of Environmental
15CY102
Science
15EC101 Basic Electronics Engineering
15ME101 Basic Mechanical Engineering
15ME104L Workshop Practice
15ME105L Engineering Graphics
15ME102 Engineering Mechanics
Automotive Basic Science
15AE102L
Laboratory
SEMESTER - III
15LE201E/ German Language - I/
15LE202E/ French Language - I/
15LE203E/ Japanese Language - I/
15LE204E/ Korean Language -I/
xiv B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
15LE205E Chinese Language - I
Quantitative Aptitude & Logical
15PD201
Reasoning – I
Fourier Series, Partial
15MA102/
15MA202 Differential Equations and its
15MA205B
Applications
15ME201 Thermodynamics 15MA102
15ME204 Machines and Mechanisms 15ME102
15ME205 Fluid Mechanics 15MA102
Manufacturing Technology for
15AE201J
Automotive Engineers
Analog, Digital Circuits for
15AE208
Automotive Applications
Automotive Components and
15AE203L 15ME105L
Assembly Drawing
SEMESTER – IV
15LE207E/ German Language -II/
15LE208E/ French Language -II/
15LE209E/ Japanese Language -II/
15LE210E/ Korean Language -II/
15LE211E Chinese Language- II
15PD202 Verbal Aptitude 15PD201
15MA102/
15MA206 Numerical Methods
15MA205B
Applied Thermal Engineering for
15AE204 15ME201
Automotive Engineers
15ME203 Mechanics of Solids 15MA102
15ME303 Materials Technology
15AE209 Automotive Control Engineering 15AE208
15ME203L Strength of Materials Laboratory 15ME203
Materials Technology
15ME303L 15ME303
Laboratory
Minor Project- I/
15AE375L/
Seminar- I/
15AE380L/
Massive Open Online Courses
15AE385L/
(MOOCs)-I/
15AE490L
Industrial Module- I
Departmental Elective I

xv B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 SEMESTER – V
Communication & Reasoning
15PD301 15PD202
Skills
15MA102/
15MA301 Probability and Statistics
15MA205B
Automotive Transducers and
15AE310 15AE208
Signal Conditioners
15AE311 I.C Engines and its Subsystems 15ME201
Vehicular Structures and
15AE312
Driveline Systems
Engine and Vehicle Testing
15AE314L 15AE310
Laboratory
Automotive Components
15AE305L 15AE305L
Laboratory
Automotive Transducers and
15AE310L 15AE310
Signal Conditioners
Industrial Training -I (To be
15AE390L
done after IV Semester)
Departmental Elective – II
Open Elective – I
SEMESTER – VI
Quantitative Aptitude & Logical
15PD302
Reasoning – II
15ME304 Fluid Power Control
Design of Automotive
15AE301 15ME203
Components
Automotive Electrical &
15AE307J 15AE208
Electronics System
15AE313 Automotive Microcontrollers 15AE208
Automotive Microcontrollers
15AE313L 15AE313
Laboratory
Minor Project- II/
15AE376L/
Seminar -II/
15AE381L/
Massive Open Online Courses
15AE386L/
(MOOCs) -II/
15AE491L
Industrial Module-II
Departmental Elective – III
Open Elective - II

xvi B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 SEMESTER - VII
15AE401 Vehicle Dynamics
Vehicle Body Engineering And 15AE302/
15AE402
Aerodynamics 15AE312
15AE404M Multi-Disciplinary Design
Modelling and Control of Electric
15AE406 15AE209
and Hybrid Vehicles
15AE401L Vehicle Dynamics Laboratory 15AE401
Electric Vehicular Systems
15AE406L 15AE406
Laboratory
Industrial Training –II (To be
15AE391L
done after VI Semester)
Departmental Elective – IV
Departmental Elective – V
SEMESTER - VIII
15AE496L Major Project/Practice School

xvii B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 DEPARTMENT OF AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENTAL ELECTIVES
Course
Course Title Pre- requisites Co-requisites
Code
DESIGN
Principles of linear systems and
15AE253E NIL 15AE208
signals
Power electronics for EV
15AE254E NIL 15AE208
application
15AE351E Automotive Fault Diagnostics 15AE307J NIL
Automotive Communication 15AE208/
15AE352E NIL
Protocols 15AE202
Artificial Neural Networks and 15AE209 /
15AE353E NIL
Fuzzy Logic 15AE251E
State Space analysis and Digital
15AE355E NIL 15AE209
Control system
Automotive Development
15AE356E 15AE209 NIL
process
15AE313/
15AE451E Intelligent Vehicle Technology NIL
15AE251E
15AE209 /
15AE452E Model Based System Design NIL
15AE251E
Vehicle Stability and Control
15AE453E 15AE209 15AE401
Systems
15AE454E Nonlinear systems 15AE209 15AE406
15AE455E Engineering Optimization 15AE209 15AE406

xviii B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 SEMESTER – I

L T P C
15PD101 Soft Skills - 1
1 0 1 1
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Course Category G General
Course designed by Career Development Centre
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To enhance holistic development of students and improve their

PURPOSE
employability skills.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Acquire inter personal skills and be an effective goal
d
oriented team player
2. Develop professionalism with idealistic, practical and
f
moral values.
3. Acquire communication and problem solving skills. g
4. Re-engineer their attitude and understand its influence
i
on behavior.

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Self Analysis 4
1 Introduction, Who am I? 1 C, I 2, 4 1, 2, 6, 7
2 SWOT analysis, Detailed self introspection 1 C, I 2, 4 1, 2, 7
Johari window, Knowing the unknown can
3 2 C, I 2, 4 1, 2, 7
bring self confidence and self esteem
Unit - II Creativity 8
Out of the box thinking, Possibility of C, I,
4 2 2, 3 1
innovation O
Creative thinking and Lateral thinking, C, I,
5 3 2, 3 1
Torrance test of creative thinking O
6 Creativity challenge 3 O 2, 3 1, 7
Unit - III Attitude 6
Factors influencing attitude, Influence of
1,2,
7 attitude on behavior, Thumb impression 2 C 1, 2, 3, 4
4
activity

1 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Challenges and lessons from attitude,
1,2,
8 Synergy between knowledge, skill and 2 C, D 1, 2, 3, 4
4
attitude
C, 1,
9. Personal, social and professional etiquette. 2 2, 4, 7
D, I 2, 4
Unit - IV Motivation 4
Motivational factors, I am good at, Self
10 1 C 2, 4 1, 2
image
Self talk, Tapping and tuning inner voice,
11 1 C, I 2, 4 1, 2
Self motivation
C,
12 Intrinsic and extrinsic motivators 2 2, 4 1, 2
D, I
Unit - V Goal setting 8
Wish list, SMART goals, Short, long, life C,
13 2 1, 2 1, 2
time goals, Goal tree D, I
C,
14 Goal poster, Blueprint for success, 5W1H 2 1, 2 1, 2
D, I
Time management, Value of time, Test C,
15 2 1, 2 1, 2
your Time management skill D, I
Weekly planner, TODO list, Prioritizing C,
16 2 1, 2 1, 2, 7
work, Time management matrix D, I
Total contact hours 30

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. SOFT SKILLS, 2015, Career Development Centre, Green Pearl Publications.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
2. Covey Sean, Seven Habits of Highly Effective Teens, New York, Fireside
Publishers, 1998.
3. Carnegie Dale, How to win Friends and Influence People, New York: Simon &
Schuster, 1998.
4. Thomas A Harris, I am ok, You are ok , New York-Harper and Row, 1972.
5. Daniel Coleman, Emotional Intelligence, Bantam Book, 2006.
6. Carnegie Dale, How to stop worrying and start living, New York: Simon &
Schuster, 1985.
7. http://empower.srmuniv.ac.in (online LMS)

2 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Course nature Fully internal
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment
In- Activities Extempore LMS Participation Total
tool
semester
Weightage 30% 25% 35% 10% 100%

L T P C
15MA101 Calculus And Solid Geometry
3 1 0 4
Co-requisite: NA
Prerequisite: NA
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category B CORE MATHEMATICS
Course designed by Department of Mathematics
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To acquire analytical ability on solving Calculus and Solid Geometry

PURPOSE
problems as applied to the respective all branches of Engineering.
STUDENT
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES
OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Apply advanced matrix knowledge to Engineering problems. a e
2. Equip themselves familiar with functions of several variables. a e
3. Familiarize with the applications of ordinary differential equations a e
4. Improve their ability in solving geometrical applications of a e
differential calculus problems.
5. Expose to the concept of three dimensional analytical geometry. a e

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Matrices 12
1. Characteristic equation 1 C,I 1 1-7
Eigen values and Eigen vectors of a
2. 2 C,I 1 1-7
real matrix
3. Properties of Eigen values 2 C,I 1 1,3,4,6
Cayley – Hamilton theorem orthogonal
4. reduction of a symmetric matrix to 2 C,I 1 1,3,4,6
diagonal form
5. Orthogonal matrices 1 C,I 1 1,3,4

3 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Reduction of quadratic form to
6. 2 C,I 1 1,3,4,6
canonical form
Quadratic form to canonical form by
7. 2 C,I 1 1,3
orthogonal transformations.
Unit - II Functions of Several
12
Variables
Function of two variables – Partial
8. 2 C,I 2 1,3,4,6
derivatives
9. Total differential 2 C,I 2 1,3,4,6
10. Taylor’s expansion 2 C,I 2 1,3
11. Maxima and Minima 2 C,I 2 1,3,4,6
Constrained Maxima and Minima by
12. 2 C,I 2 1,3,
Lagrangian Multiplier method
13. Jacobians 2 C,I 2 1-7
Unit - III Ordinary Differential
12
Equations
Linear equations of second order with
14. 2 C,I 3 2,5,7
constant and variable coefficients
15. Homogeneous equation of Euler type 2 C,I 3 2,5,7,1
Homogeneous equation of
16. 2
Legendre’s Type
Equations reducible to homogeneous
17. 2 C,I 3 2,5,7
form
18. Variation of parameters 2 C,I 3 1,2
Simultaneous first order with constant
19. 2 C,I 3 1,2
co-efficient.
Unit - IV Geometrical Applications
12
of Differential Calculus
20. Curvature – Cartesian coordinates 2 C,I 4 7
21. Curvature – polar coordinates 2 C,I 4 7
22. Circle of curvature 2 C,I 4 1
23. Centre of curvature 2 C,I 4 7
24. Evolutes 2 C,I 4 4,5
25. Envelopes 2 C,I 4 7
Unit - V Three Dimensional
12
Analytical Geometry
Equation of a sphere – Plane section
26. 2 C,I 5 3,4
of a sphere

4 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
27. Tangent Plane – Orthogonal spheres 2 C,I 5 3,4
28. Equation of a cone 2 C,I 5 4
29. Right circular cone 2 C,I 5 3,4
30. Equation of a cylinder 2 C,I 5 2,3
31. Right circular cylinder. 2 C,I 5 3,4
Total contact hours 60

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Kreyszig.E, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons.
Singapore,10th edition, 2012.
2. K.Ganesan, Sundarammal Kesavan, K.S.Ganapathy Subramanian
&V.Srinivasan, “Engineering Mathematics”,Gamma publications, Revised
Edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. Grewal B.S, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publications, 42nd
Edition,2012.
4. Veerajan. T, “Engineering Mathematics I”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co,
New Delhi, 5th edition, 2006.
5. Kandasamy P etal. “Engineering Mathematics”, Vol.I (4th revised edition),
S.Chand &Co., New Delhi, 2000.
6. Narayanan S., Manicavachagom Pillay T.K., Ramanaiah G., “Advanced
Mathematics for Engineering students”, Volume I (2nd edition), S.Viswanathan
Printers and Publishers, 1992.
7. Venkataraman M.K., “Engineering Mathematics” – First Year (2nd edition),
National Publishing Co., Chennai, 2000.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

5 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 L T P C
15ME105L Engineering Graphics
2 0 3 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / First Angle Projection is to be followed - Practice with
Codes/Standards Computer Aided Drafting toolsIS STANDARD
Course Category E ENGINEERING SCIENCES
Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

1. To draw and interpret various projections of 1D, 2D and 3D objects.

PURPOSE
2. To prepare and interpret the drawings of buildings.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To familiarize with the construction of geometrical
g
figures
2. To familiarize with the projection of 1D, 2D and 3D
g k
objects
3. To familiarize with the sectioning of solids and
g k
development of surfaces
4. To familiarize with the Preparation and interpretation
g k
of building drawing

Sl. Contact C-D-I-

Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours O
1. Introduction to Engineering Graphics 2 C,D 1,2 1,2,3
and Drafting tool
Introduction to Engineering drawing
- Drawing instruments (including Mini
drafter)
- Lettering
- Line type
- Drawing standards and codes
- Drawing sheet layout (Margins and
Title block)
Introduction to Drafting package
- Graphical User Interface (GUI) –
- Setting work area and Title block
- Draw: Line, Arc, Circle
- Modify: Erase, Offset, Move, Copy
6 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Sl. Contact C-D-I-
Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours O
Manual Drafting 1 C,D
- Drawing sheet layout
- Alphabets of height 5 and 7 mm -
Numerals 0 to 9 of height 5 and 7
mm
- Drawing basic entities
Computer Aided Drafting 2
- Draw the given figures using
drafting package
2. Review of Geometric construction & 2 C 1 1,2,3
Introduction to modifying commands
Geometric constructions:
- Dividing a line into ‘n’ parts
- Bisecting an arc
- Drawing an arc tangent to two
straight lines
- Construction of polygon
Introduction to Modify commands
- Demonstration of Modify
commands in drafting package
Manual Drafting 1 D
- Geometric constructions
Computer Aided Drafting 2
- Draw the given figures using
drafting package
3. Layers, Dimensioning, Hatching and 2 C 2 1,2,3
Text
Demonstration of commands
- Layers
- Dimensions
- Hatching
- Text
Computer Aided Drafting 3 D
- Draw the given figures using
drafting package
4. Conic sections and Special curves 2 C 1,2 1,2,3
Construction of Conic sections:
- Parabola : Tangent and Rectangle
method
7 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Sl. Contact C-D-I-
Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours O
- Ellipse: Oblong method and
concentric circle method –
- Hyperbola – Eccentricity method
- Construction of special curves: -
Cycloid - Spiral
Manual Drafting 2 D
- Construction of conic sections and
cycloid
Computer Aided Drafting 1 D
- Draw the given figures using
drafting package
5. Introduction to orthographic 2 C 2,3 1,2,3
projections:
- I, II, III and IV angle projections
- Projection of Points in different
quadrants
- Projection of Lines: Inclined to one
plane
- Projection of planes
- Conceptual free hand sketching
Manual Drafting 3 D
- Conceptual sketching
- Projection of points, lines and
planes
6. Solids I 2 C 2 1,2,3
Introduction to solids :
- Polyhedron
- Prisms
Introduction to 3D Tools:
- Modeling
Manual Drafting 1 D
- Projection of solid
Computer Aided Drafting 2 D
- Modeling of polyhedron and prisms
- Generating orthographic views of
solids
7. Solids II 2 C 2 1,2,3
Introduction to solids:
- Pyramids
8 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Sl. Contact C-D-I-
Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours O
- Solids of revolution
Introduction to 3D Tools:
- Modeling
Manual Drafting 2 D
- Projection of solids
Computer Aided Drafting 1 D
- Modeling of pyramids & solids of
revolution and generating the
orthographic views
8. Solids – III 2 C 2 1,2,3
Orthographic views
- Orthographic views of the given
pictorial view / model
- Demonstration of modeling of
components using Extrude and
Revolve
- Boolean operations
Manual Drafting 1 D
- Drawing orthographic views of
machine components in grid sheet
Computer Aided Drafting 2 D
- Modeling of simple machine
components and generating its
orthographic views
9. Solids – IV 2 C 2 1,2,3
- Demonstration of modeling of
components using Loft, Sweep,
Helical sweep and Shell.
Computer Aided Drafting 3 D
- Modeling of components using
Boolean operations and generating
its orthographic views
10. Section of Solids 2 C 2,3 1,2,3
Introduction to Section of regular
solids
- Section plane
- Sectional view
Manual Drafting 2 D
- Section of solids
9 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Sl. Contact C-D-I-
Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours O
Computer Aided Drafting 1 D
- Modeling the regular solids and
section it to obtain the sectional
views
11. Development of surfaces 2 C 2,3 1,2,3
- Introduction
- Methods
- Application
Manual Drafting 3 D
- Development of surfaces
12. Building Drawing 2 C 4 1,2,3
- Components of a building
- Conventional representation of
building materials
- Scale
Computer Aided Drafting 3 D
- Drawing the plan, elevation and
sectional views of a building
Total contact hours 60

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
REFERENCES
No.
1. Venugopal, K. and Prabhu Raja, V., Engineering Graphics, Eighth Edition
(Revised), New Age International Publishers, Chennai, 2007.
2. Natarajan, K.V., A Text Book of Engineering Graphics, 21st Edition,
Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2012.
3. Jeyapoovan, T., Engineering Drawing and Graphics using AutoCAD, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
4. Bethune, J.D., Engineering Graphics with AutoCAD 2013, PHI Learning
Private Limited, Delhi, 2013.
5. Bhatt, N.D., Elementary Engineering Drawing (First Angle Projection),
Charotar Publishing Co., Anand, 1999.
6. Narayanan, K. L. and Kannaiah, P., Engineering Graphics, Scitech
Publications, Chennai, 1999.
7. Shah, M. B. and Rana, B. C., Engineering Drawing, Pearson Education
(Singapore) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.

10 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Course nature Practical
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model
In- Experiments Record Total
tool Voce examination
semester
Weightage 50% - - 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%

11 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 SEMESTER - II

L T P C
15PD102 Soft Skills - 2
1 0 1 1
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Course Category G General
Course designed by Career Development Centre
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To enhance holistic development of students and improve their

PURPOSE
employability skills.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Acquire inter personal skills and be an effective goal
d
oriented team player
2. Develop professionalism with idealistic, practical and
f
moral values.
3. Acquire communication and problem solving skills. g
4. Re-engineer their attitude and understand its influence
i
on behavior.

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit I – Interpersonal skills
Gratitude, Being thankful, Secret of
1 2 C, I 2 1, 2, 3, 4
happiness, Satin ribbon activity
Stages of dependence,
Understanding the integration of
2 2 C 1, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4
leadership, networking and
teamwork
Assessing interpersonal skills,
3 2 C, I 1, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4
situation analysis
Importance of teamwork,
4 4 C, O 1, 3, 4 3, 4
Teamwork activity
Unit II - Leadership
Skills needed for a good leader,
5 2 C 1-4 1, 3, 7
Types of leadership style
Assessment of leadership skills,
6 2 C, I 1-4 1, 3, 7
Wheel of leadership

12 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit III – Stress management
Causes of stress and its impact,
7 Let it down, How to manage and 2 C 4 1, 6
de-stress,
Circle of control, Daily life can be a
8 2 C 4 1, 6
stress buster, Stress activity
Emotional intelligence, Emotional
9. 2 C, I 1, 2, 4 1, 4, 5
quotient and intelligence quotient
10 Emotion scale, Managing emotions 2 C, I 1, 2, 4 1, 4, 5
Unit IV – Conflict resolution
Conflicts in human relations, Self
11 assessment test for conflict 1 C 1-4 1, 3, 4
management
12 Approaches to conflict resolution 1 C 1-4 1, 3, 4
13 Case study 2 C, I 1-4 1, 7
Unit V – Decision making
Importance of decision making,
14 1 C 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 6
Impact of decision in life
15 Weighing positives and negatives 1 C, I 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 6
Process and practical way of C, D,
16 2 1, 2, 3 1, 2
decision making I
Total contact hours 30

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. SOFT SKILLS, 2015, Career Development Centre, Green Pearl Publications.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
2. Covey Sean, “Seven Habits of Highly Effective Teens”, New York, Fireside
Publishers, 1998.
3. Carnegie Dale, “How to win Friends and Influence People”, New York: Simon &
Schuster, 1998.
4. Thomas A Harris, “I am ok, You are ok” , New York-Harper and Row, 1972.
5. Daniel Coleman, “Emotional Intelligence”, Bantam Book, 2006.
6. Carnegie Dale, “How to stop worrying and start living”, New York: Simon &
Schuster, 1985.
7. http://empower.srmuniv.ac.in (Online LMS)

13 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Course nature Fully internal
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Tech
In- Activities LMS Participation Total
tool talk
semester
Weightage 40% 25% 25% 10% 100%

Advanced Calculus And L T P C

15MA102
Complex Analysis 3 1 0 4
Co-requisite: NA
Prerequisite: 15MA101
Data Book /
NA
Codes/Standards
Course Category B CORE MATHEMATICS
Course designed by Department of Mathematics
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To acquire analytical ability on solving Advanced Calculus and Complex

PURPOSE
Analysis problems as applied to the respective branches of Engineering.
STUDENT
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES
OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Apply multiple integrals knowledge to Engineering problems. a e
2. Improve their ability in solving vector calculus problems. a e
3. Equip themselves familiar with Laplace Transforms. a e
4. Familiarize with the applications of analytic functions. a e
5. Expose to the concept of complex integration. a e

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Multiple Integrals 12
Evaluation of double integration in
1. 2 C,I 1 1-7
Cartesian and plane polar coordinates
Evaluation of double integral by
2. 2 C, I 1 1,3,4,6
changing of order of integration
Area as a double integral (Cartesian
3. 2 C, I 1 1,3,4,6
and polar)
Triple integration in Cartesian
4. 2 C, I 1 1,3,4,6
coordinates
Conversion from Cartesian to polar in
5. 2 C, I 1 1,3,4,6
double integrals
14 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
6. Volume as a Triple Integral. 2 C, I 1 1,3,4,6
Unit - II Vector Calculus 12
Review of vectors in 2,3 dimensions
7. ,Gradient, divergence, curl – 2 C,I 2 1,3,4,6
Solenoidal and irrotational fields
Vector identities (without proof) –
8. 2 C, I 2 1,3
Directional derivatives
9. Line, surface and volume integrals 2 C, I 2 1,3
10. Green’s theorem (without proof), 2 C, I 2 1,3
Gauss divergence theorem (without
11. proof), verification and applications 2 C, I 2 1,3
to cubes and parallelopipeds only
Stoke’s theorems (without proof) –
12. Verification and applications to cubes 2 C, I 2 1,3
and parallelopipeds only.
Unit - III Laplace Transforms 12
Transforms of standard functions –
13. properties – Transforms of derivatives 2 C,I 3 2,5,7
and integrals
Initial and final value theorems
14. 2 C, I 3 2,5,7,1
(without proof)
15. Inverse Laplace transforms 2 C, I 3 2,5,7
ILT using Convolution theorem -
16. 2 C, I 3 1,2
problems only
LT of periodic functions -problems
17. 2 C, I 3 1,2
only
Applications of Laplace transforms for
solving linear ordinary differential
18. 2 C, I 3 1,2
equations up to second order with
constant coefficient only
Unit - IV Analytic Functions 12 3.6
Definition of Analytic Function –
19. 2 C,I 4 7
Cauchy Riemann equations
Properties of analytic function
20. 2 C,I 4 1,2
functions
Determination of analytic function
21. 2 C, I 4 1
using – Milne-Thomson’s method

15 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Conformal mappings: magnification
22. 2 C,I 4 1,2
and rotation
Conformal mappings: inversion and
23. 2 C, I 4 4,5
reflection
24. bilinear transformation 2 C, I 4 1,2
Unit - V Complex Integration 12
Cauchy’s integral theorem (without
25. 2 C,I 5 3,4
proof) –and its applications
26. Cauchy’s integral formulae 2 C,I 5 3,4
Taylor’s and Laurent’s expansions
27. 2 C, I 5 4
with simple problems
Singularities – Types of Poles and
28. 2 C,I 5 3,4
Residues
Cauchy’s residue theorem (without
29. 2 C, I 5 2,3
proof)-
Contour integration: Unit circle,
30. 2 C, I 5 3,4
semicircular contour.
Total contact hours 60

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Kreyszig.E, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons. Singapore,
10th edition, 2012.
2. K.Ganesan, Sundarammal Kesavan, K.S.Ganapathy Subramanian &V.Srinivasan,
“Engineering Mathematics”,Gamma publications, Revised Edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. Grewal B.S, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publications, 42nd
Edition,2012.
4. Veerajan. T, “Engineering Mathematics I”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co, New
Delhi, 5th edition, 2006.
5. Kandasamy P etal. “Engineering Mathematics”, Vol.I (4th revised edition),
S.Chand &Co., New Delhi, 2000.
6. Narayanan S., Manicavachagom Pillay T.K., Ramanaiah G., “Advanced
Mathematics for Engineering students”, Volume I (2nd edition), S.Viswanathan
Printers and Publishers, 1992.
7. Venkataraman M.K., “Engineering Mathematics” – First Year (2nd edition),
National Publishing Co., Chennai, 2000.

16 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
L T P C
15ME101 Basic Mechanical Engineering
2 0 0 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: Nil
Data Book /
Nil
Codes/Standards
Course Category E ENGINEERING SCINCES
Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

PURPOSE To familiarize the students with the basics of Mechanical Engineering.

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student should be able to
understand
1. Basic machine elements a e
2. Sources of Energy and Power Generation a e
3. Various manufacturing processes a e

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Machine Elements 6
Springs : Helical and leaf springs ,
1. 1 C 1 1,3
Classification, Terms, Materials
Springs in series and parallel ,
Importance of the combination of
2. 1 C, D 1 1,3
springs, Applications of springs,
numerical in springs
Cams: Types of cams and followers ,
Classification , Based on
3. Input/Output Motion, Follower 1 C 1 1,3
configuration , Follower arrangement
and Cam shape

17 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Cam profile , Cam nomenclature,
4. 1 C 1 1,3
Application, Motion of the follower
Power Transmission , Gears
5. terminology, Spur , Helical ,Bevel 1 C 1 1,3
gears and gear trains applications
Belt drives , Types of belt drives, Belt
materials and Applications, numerical
6. in open and cross belt drives, Chain 1 C, D 1 1,3
drives , Comparison of gear, belt
drives and chain drives
Unit - II Energy Sources 6
Renewable and Nonrenewable
7. Sources, Characteristics, types, 1 C 2 1,3
Advantages and disadvantages
Solar thermal systems and tower
8. power generation, Solar photovoltaic 1 C 2 1,3
system
Wind energy, Horizontal axis wind
9. turbines, Vertical axis wind turbines, 1 C 2 1,3
advantages and disadvantages
Geothermal energy, Indian
10. geothermal sources, advantages and 1 C 2 1,3
disadvantages
Ocean energy, ocean thermal energy
11. 1 C 2 1,3
conversion
Tidal energy , Single pool tidal
12. 1 C 2 1,3
energy conversion system
Unit - III Power Generation 6
Power Generation : external and
13. 1 C 2 1,3
internal combustion engines
Classification of engines, Engine
14. operations : 2 stroke & 4stroke, 1 C 2 1,3
Comparison of SI & CI engines,
overview of fuels, Applications,
15. Numerical –internal combustion 1 C,D 2 1,3
engines

18 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Thermal Power Plants : layouts,
element/component description,
16. 1 C 2 1,3
advantages, disadvantages,
applications
Hydro power plants : layouts,
element/component description,
17. 1 C 2 1,3
advantages, disadvantages,
applications
Nuclear power plant :layouts,
element/component description,
advantages, disadvantages,
18. 1 C 2 1,3
applications, Element/component
description of boiling water reactor
and pressurized water reactor
Unit - IV Manufacturing Processes I 6
Sheet metal work : Introduction,
19. 1 C 3 1,3
equipment, Tools, accessories
20. Sheet metal Various processes 1 C 3 1,3
Sheet metal application, advantages
21. 1 C 3 1,3
and disadvantages.
Welding : Types, Equipment, Tools
22. and accessories ,Techniques 1 C 3 1,3
employed
Applications of gas and arc welding
23. 1 C 3 1,3
,gas cutting
Brazing and soldering, Advantages
24. 1 C 3 1,3
and disadvantages,
Unit - V Manufacturing Processes II 6
Lathe Practice: Types, Description of
25. 1 C 3 1,3
main components
Lathe Cutting tools and Work holding
26. 1 C 3 1,3
devices ,basic operations
27. Numerical on lathe operations 1 C, D 3 1,3
Drilling Practice : Introduction, Types,
28. 1 C 3 1,3
Description, Drilling Tools,
Drilling operations, special operations
29. on drilling machines, drill holding 1 C 3 1,3
devices,

19 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
30. Numerical on drilling operations 1 C, D 3 1,3
Total contact hours 30

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Kumar.T, LeenusJesu Martin and Murali.G, “Basic Mechanical Engineering”,
Suma Publications, Chennai, 2007.
2. Prabhu.T.J, Jai Ganesh. V, and Jebaraj.S, “Basic Mechanical Engineering”,
Scitech Publications, Chennai, 2000
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. HajraChoudhary.S.K, and HajraChoudhary.A.K, “Elements of Workshop
Technology”, Vols. I & II, Indian Book Distributing Company Calcutta, 2007
4. Nag.P.K, “Power Plant Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008
5. Rattan.S.S, “Theory of Machines”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15ME102 Engineering Mechanics
3 1 0 4
Co-requisite: Nil
Prerequisite: Nil
Data Book /
Nil
Codes/Standards
Course Category E ENGINEERING SCIENCES
Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

20 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 To develop the ability in the engineering student, to understand,
PURPOSE formulate, and solve a given problem in a logical manner and to apply it to
solve a few basic problems in engineering mechanics.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to apply
concepts of
1. Static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies a e
2. Friction and its applications a e
3. Trusses and centriods a e
4. Moment of inertia of surfaces and volumes a e
5. Dynamic equilibrium of particles a e
in solving basic problems in engineering mechanics

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Statics of Particles and
12
Rigid Bodies
Equilibrium of Particles: Fundamental C,D
concepts and principles of
1. 1 1 1,5
engineering mechanics, Laws of
mechanics.
2. Tutorial on Equilibrium of Particles 1 C,D 1 1,5
Forces on particles: Concurrent C,D
forces in a plane, Coplanar forces,
3. 1 1 1,5
Vector approach on addition,
subtraction of forces.
Tutorial on Resolution of forces, C,D
4. Resultant of several concurrent 1 1 1,5
forces
Tutorial on several concurrent forces C,D
5. 1 1 1,5
( Vector approach)
6. Free body diagram, Forces in planes. 1 C,D 1 1,5
7. Tutorial on Forces in planes 1 C,D 1 1,5
8. Forces in space : vector approach 1 C,D 1 1,5
9. Tutorial on forces in space 1 C,D 1 1,5
Equilibrium of rigid bodies: Principle C,D
10. of transmissibility, Moment of a force 1 1 1,5
,Varignon's Theorem

21 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Equivalent system of forces, C,D
11. Reduction of system of forces into 1 1 1,5
single force and couple
Equilibrium of rigid bodies in two
12. dimensions, Equilibrium of a two 1 C,D 1 1,5
force body
Unit - II Friction 12
Friction: Laws of Friction, Angle of C,D
13. 1 2 1,5
Friction , Dry friction
14. Tutorial on Dry friction 2 C,D 2 1,5
15. Tutorial on Wedge friction 2 C,D 2 1,5
16. Tutorial on Rolling friction 1 C,D 2 1,5
Derivation of tension ratio of Flat Belt C,D
1 2 1,5
17. and V Belts
18. Tutorial on Belt Friction 1 C,D 2 1,5
19. Ladder Friction 1 C,D 2 1,5
20. Tutorial on Ladder Friction 1 C,D 2 1,5
Screw Friction and its application on C,D
2 2 1,5
21. screw jack
Unit - III Analysis of Trusses and
12
Centriods
Types of loads, Types of supports C,D
1 3 1,5
22. and their reactions
Simple Trusses: Analysis of Trusses C,D
1 3 1,5
23. by Method of joints
Tutorial on Analysis of Trusses by C,D
2 3 1,5
24. Method of joints
Analysis of Trusses by Method of C,D
1 3 1,5
25. sections
Tutorial on Analysis of Trusses by C,D
2 3 1,5
26. Method of sections
Centre of Gravity: Centroids of lines, C,D
1 3 1,5
27. areas and volumes
Tutorial on determination of centroids C,D
1 3 1,5
28. by integration method
29. Theorem of Pappus & Guldinus 1 C,D 3 1,5
Tutorial on centroids of composite C,D
2 3 1,5
30. areas

22 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - IV Moment of Inertia of
12
Surfaces and Volumes
Moment of Inertia: Determination of C,D
moment of inertia of area by 1 4 1,5
31. integration
Tutorial on Moment of Inertia by C,D
2 4 1,5
32. integration method
Moment of Inertia by analytical C,D
1 4 1,5
33. method
Tutorial on Moment of Inertia by C,D
2 4 1,5
34. analytical method
Radius of gyration, Parallel and C,D
1 4 1,5
35. perpendicular axis theorems
36. Tutorial on Polar moment of inertia 1 C,D 4 1,5
37. Moment of inertia of different sections 2 C,D 4 1,5
38. Tutorial on mass moment of inertia 2 C,D 4 1,5
Unit – V Dynamics of Particles 12
Rectilinear motion, uniform velocity
39. 1 C,D 5 1,2
and uniform acceleration motion
Tutorial on Curvilinear motion :
Rectangular, Normal, tangential,
40. 1 C,D 5 1,2
radial and transverse components of
velocity and acceleration
Motion of projectile -horizontal range,
41. time of flight, maximum height & 2 C,D 5 1,2
tutorial
Tutorial on Newton's second law of
42. 1 C,D 5 1,2
motion
43. D'Alembert's principle & tutorial 1 C,D 5 1,2
Principle of work and energy (kinetic
44. and potential energy), conservative 1 C,D 5 1,2
forces
45. Tutorial on work energy principle 1 C,D 5 1,2
Principle of impulse and momentum ,
46. 1 C,D 5 1,2
problems on Impulsive motion
47. Tutorial on impulse and momentum 1 C,D 5 1,2
Impact of elastic bodies: Tutorial on
48. 1 C,D 5 1,2
direct impact of elastic bodies

23 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Tutorial on oblique impact of elastic
49. 1 C,D 5 1,2
bodies
Total contact hours 60

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
Ferdinand.P. Beer. E, Russell Johnston Jr., David Mazurek, Philip J Cornwell,
1. “Vector Mechanics for Engineers: Statics and Dynamics”, McGraw - Hill, New
Delhi, Tenth Edition, 2013.
T.J.Prabhu “Engineering Mechanics” SCITECH Publications (india) Pvt Ltd,
2.
Chennai reprint, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
Timoshenko, and Young, “Engineering Mechanics”, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Book
3.
Company, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2013.
Meriam J.L and Kraige L.G., Engineering Mechanics, Volume I - statics,
4.
Volume II - dynamics, John Wiley & Sons, New York,7th edition, 2012
Rajasekaran.S, & Sankarasubramanian.G, “Engineering Mechanics”, Vikas
5.
Publishing House Pvt Ltd, 2011.
Shames.I.H, and Krishna Mohana Rao.G, “Engineering Mechanics (Statics and
6.
Dynamics)”, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Pearson Education), 2006.
Dr.Bansal.R.K, & Sanjay Bansal, “A Text book of Engineering Mechanics”,
7.
Lakshimi publications, Edition 7, 2011
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15ME104L Workshop Practice
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: Nil
Prerequisite: Nil
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category E Engineering Sciences and Technical Arts
Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016
24 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 To provide the students with hands on experience on different trades
PURPOSE
of engineering like fitting, carpentry, smithy, welding and sheet metal.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. To familiarize with the basics of tools and equipments
used in fitting, carpentry, sheet metal, welding and b c g
smithy
2. To familiarize with the production of simple models in
b c g
the above trades

Sl. Contact C-D-

Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
Step fitting of two metal plates using fitting
1. 3 I 1,2 1
tools.
Drilling & Tapping for generating hole and
2. 3 I 1,2 1
internal thread on a metal plate.
Simple turning of cylindrical surface on MS
3. 3 I 1,2 1
rod using lathe machine tool.
Plumbing of bathroom/kitchen fitting using
4. 3 I 1,2 1
various plumbing components and tools
Butt joint of two metal plates using arc
5. 3 I 1,2 1
welding process.
Lap joint of two metal plates overlapping on
6. 3 I 1,2 1
one another using arc welding process.
“T’ joint of a metal plate at perpendicular
7. direction over another plate using arc 3 I 1,2 1
welding process.
8. MIG welding of metal plates 3 I 1,2 1
Cross halving joint of two wooden pieces at
9. 3 I 1,2 1
perpendicular direction.
Dovetail halving joint of two wooden pieces
10. 3 I 1,2 1
in the shape of dovetail.
To make circular shapes, grooving in wood
11. 3 I 1,2 1
piece using wood turning lathe.
To make duster from wooden piece using
12. 3 I 1,2 1
carpentry tools.
To make rectangular shaped tray using GI
13. 3 I 1,2 1
sheet.
To make geometrical shape like frustum,
14. 3 I 1,2 1
cone and prisms using GI sheet.
15. To make bigger size scoop using GI sheet. 3 I 1,2 1
25 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Sl. Contact C-D-
Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
To forge chisel from MS rod using black
16. 3 I 1,2 1
smithy
Total contact hours 60

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
REFERENCES
No.
1. Gopal.T.V, Kumar.T, and Murali.G, “A first course on workshop practice –
Theory, Practice and Work Book”, Suma Publications, Chennai, 2005.
2. Kannaiah.P and Narayanan.K.C, “Manual on Workshop Practice”, Scitech
Publications, Chennai, 1999.

Course nature Practical

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model
In- Experiments Record Total
tool Voce examination
semester
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%

L T P C
15AE102L Automotive Basic Science Laboratory
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

To provide the knowledge about the application of numerical

PURPOSE
simulation for solving engineering problems.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Design and conduct experiments as well as to
b
analyze and interpret data
2. Equip themselves familiar with functions of several
b
components

26 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
3. Get familiarize the use of computers for solving
analytical problems numerically ,Solve the system of a b e
linear equations numerically
4. Explore more on numerical solvers for solving linear
ordinary differential equations, Perform Matrix
a b d e
operations and solve Eigen value problems and its
applications.
5. Design a swinging pendulum and solve its dynamics
a b d e
numerically

Sl. Contact C-D-

Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
Part - A Artifact Dissection
Dismantling and Assembling of the I,O
1. 2 1,2 3
Bicycle
Dismantling and Assembling of Piston I,O
2. and Kick Started Assembly from the 2 1,2 3
given 2-S IC Engine
Dismantling and Assembling of the I,O
3. 2 1,2 3
given Hand Drilling Machine
Part - B Numerical Simulation
Introduction to Numerical simulation C,I,O
4. ,Solving Linear equations with 2 3 1
numerical simulation
Interpolation, zeros and roots ,Least I,O
5. squares, Solving first order Linear 2 3 2,5
ODE and application examples
6. Introduction to Matrix operation 2 I,O 4 4
7. Matrix operations with examples 2 I,O 4 1
Solving for Eigen Values and Singular I,O
8. 2 4 4
values and its application
Modelling of systems with swinging C,I,O
9. 2 5 1
pendulum example
Numerical simulation of a swinging I,O
10. 2 5 4
pendulum
Total contact hours 20

27 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. C.Moler, Numerical Computing with MATLAB, The MathWorks, Inc., Natick,
Massachusets,2008
2. Lab Manual for “Numerical simulation Laboratory”
3. Lab Manual for “Artifact Dissection Laboratory”
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
4. Glyn James, David Burley, Dick Clements, Phil Dyke, John Searl-Advanced
Modern Engineering Mathematics, 4th Edition -Prentice Hall (2011)
5. Erwin Kreyszig -Advanced Engineering Mathematics,9th edition wiley India
(2006)

Course nature Theory + Practical

Assessment Method – Theory Component (Weightage 50%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Cycle test I Quiz Total
tool test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

Assessment Method – Practical Component (Weightage 50%)

Assessment MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model
In- Experiments Record Total
tool Voce examination
semester
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%

28 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 SEMESTER - III

L T P C
15PD201 Quantitative Aptitude & Logical Reasoning – I
1 0 1 1
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category G GENERAL
Course designed by Career Development Centre
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To give the right knowledge, skill and aptitude to face any competitive
PURPOSE
examination.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. build a strong base in the fundamental mathematical
a
concepts
2. grasp the approaches and strategies to solve
e
problems with speed and accuracy
3. gain appropriate skills to succeed in preliminary
i
selection process for recruitment
4. Collectively solve problems in teams & group. d

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Pure Arithmetic-I 6
1. Types of numbers, Divisibility tests 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
2. LCM and GCD 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
Unit digit, Number of zeroes, Factorial C-I-O
3. 1 1-4 1-4,7-10
notation
4. Square root, cube roots 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
5. Identities 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
6. Fractions and Decimals, surds 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
Unit - II Commercial Arithmetic-1
Arithmetic-I Arches and Suspension 6
Cables
7. Percentage Intro 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
8. Percentage Problems 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
9. Profit and Loss 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
29 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
10. Discount 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
11. Simple Interest 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
12. Compound Interest 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
Unit - III Algebra I 6
13. Logarithms Intro 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
14. Logarithms Rules 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
15. Linear Equations 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
16. Ages 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
17. Quadratic Equations and Inequations 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
18. Surprise Test I 1
Unit - IV Modern Mathematics I 6
19. Permutations 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
20. Permutations 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
21. Combination 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
22. Combination 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
23. Probability 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
24. Probability 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,7-10
Unit - V Reasoning 6
25. Deductive Reasoning 1 C-I-O 1-4 5-10
26. Deductive Reasoning 1 C-I-O 1-4 5-10
27. Information Ordering 1 C-I-O 1-4 5-10
28. Information Ordering 1 C-I-O 1-4 5-10
29. Inductive Reasoning 1 C-I-O 1-4 5-10
30. Surprise test II 1
Total contact hours 30

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. No. TEXT BOOK
1. Dinesh Khattar-The Pearson Guide to QUANTITATIVE APTITUDE for
competitive examinations.
2. REFERENCE BOOKS
3. Dr. Agarwal.R.S – “Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations”,
S.Chand &Company Limited 2011
4. Abhijit Guha, “Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations”, Tata
McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2011
5. Arun Sharma-“Quantitative aptitude for CAT”, Tata McGraw Hill
6. Edgar Thrope, “Test Of Reasoning for Competitive Examinations”, Tata
McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2012
30 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 7. Dr. Agarwal.R.S – A modern approach to non-verbal reasoning, S.Chand
&Company Limited 2011
ON-LINE RESOURCES
8. www.indiabix.com
9. www.lofoya.com
10. www.careerbless.com
11. www.achieversforce.com

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surpris
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III e Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

Fourier Series, Partial Differential Equations L T P C

15MA202
and it’s Applications 4 0 0 4
Co-requisite: NOT APPLICABLE
Prerequisite: 15MA102(or)15MA205B
Data Book /
NA
Codes/Standards
Course Category B CORE MATHEMATICS
Course designed by Department of Mathematics
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

The purpose of this course is to develop the skills of the students in

PURPOSE
the areas of boundary value problems and transform techniques.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. To know to formulate and solve partial differential
a e
equation
2. To have thorough knowledge in Fourier series a e
3. To learn to solve boundary value problems a e
4. To be familiar with applications of PDE in two
a e
dimensional heat equation
5. To gain good knowledge in the application of Fourier
a e
transform

31 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
Hours I-O
1. Unit - I Partial Differential Equations 14
Formation of partial differential equation by
2. 1 C,I 1 1–7
eliminating arbitrary constants
Formation of partial differential equation by
3. 1 C,I 1 1–7
eliminating arbitrary functions
Formation of partial differential equation by
4. eliminating arbitrary functions of the form 2 C,I 1 1–7
 (u , v )  0
Solution of standard types of first order
5. 2 C,I 1 1–7
equations
Solution of standard types of first order
6. 2
equations
7. Lagrange's linear equation of first order 2 C,I 1 1–7
Linear Homogeneous partial differential
8. equations of second and higher order with 2 C,I 1 1–7
constant coefficients.
Linear Homogeneous partial differential
9. equations of second and higher order with 2 C,I 1 1–7
constant coefficients
10. Unit - II Fourier Series 14
Introduction of Fourier series -Dirichlet’s
11. C,I 2 1–7
conditions for existence of Fourier Series 1
Fourier series –related problems in
12. 1 C,I 2 1–7
0 , 2  
Fourier series –related problems in
13. 1 C,I 2 1–7
  ,  
Fourier series –related problems in
14. 1 C,I 2 1–7
0 , 2 l 
Fourier series –related problems in
15. 1 C,I 2 1–7
 l, l 
Half Range Cosine series-related
16. 2 C,I 2 1–7
problems
17. Half Range sine series-related problems 2 C,I 1–7
Parseval’s Identity( without proof)-related
18. 2 C,I 2 1–7
problems

32 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
Hours I-O
Harmonic Analysis for finding fundamental
19. 1 C,I 2 1–7
harmonic, second and third harmonic
Harmonic Analysis for finding fundamental
20. 2 C.I 2 1–7
harmonic, second and third harmonic
21. Unit - III Boundary Value Problems 12
Classification of partial differential
equations. Method of separation of
22. 2 C,I 3 1–7
variables. One dimensional Wave
Equation and its possible solutions
Initial and Boundary value Problems with
23. 2 C,I 3 1–7
zero velocity – related problems
Initial and Boundary value Problems with
24. 2 C,I 3 1–7
Nonzero velocity- related problems
One dimensional heat equation and its
25. C,I 1–7
possible solutions 2
Steady state conditions and zero boundary
26. 2 C,I 3 1–7
conditions- related problems
Steady state conditions and Non-zero
27. 2 C,I 3 1–7
boundary conditions- related problems
Unit - IV Two Dimensional Heat
28. 10
Equation
Introduction to two dimensional heat
29. equation and its possible solutions in 2 C,I 4 1–7
steady state
Laplace equation in Cartesian form- Finite
30. 2 C,I 4 1–7
plates
Laplace equation in Cartesian form-
31. 2 C,I 4 1–7
Infinite plates
Laplace equation in Polar form-semi
32. 2 C,I 4 1–7
circular, circular,
Laplace equation in Polar form- Quadrant
33. 2 C,I 4 1–7
and Annulus
34. Unit - V Fourier Transforms 10
Fourier Transforms- Elementary properties
35. 2 C,I 5 1–7
of Fourier transforms
Fourier Transforms and related problems-
36. 2 C,I 1–7
Fast Fourier Transform

33 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
Hours I-O
Fourier Sine Transforms and their
37. 2 C,I 5 1–7
properties-problems
Fourier Cosine Transforms and their
38. 2 C,I 1–7
properties-problems
Convolution Theorem (without proof)-
39. 1 C,I 5 1–7
applications
Parseval’s Identity(without proof)-
40. 1 C,I 5 1–7
applications
Total 60

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. No. TEXT BOOKS
Kreyszig.E, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 10th edition, John Wiley &
1.
Sons. Singapore, 2012.
2. Grewal B.S, “Higher Engg Maths”, Khanna Publications, 42nd Edition, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
Sivaramakrishna Das P. and Vijayakumari.C, A text book of Engineering
3.
Mathematics-III,Viji’s Academy,2010
Kandasamy, P., etal., Engineering Mathematics, Vol. II & Vol. III (4th revised
4.
edition), S.Chand & Co., New Delhi, 2000
Narayanan, S., Manickavachagom Pillay, T., and Ramanaiah,G., Advanced
5. Mathematics for Engineering students, Volume II & III (2nd edition),
S,Viswanathan Printers Publishers, 1992
Venkataraman, M, K., Engineering Mathematics - Vol.III - A & B (13th edition),
6.
National Publishing Co., Chennai, 1998.
Sankara Rao, “Introduction to Partial Differential Equations”, 2nd Edition, PHI
7.
Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2006.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle test Cycle Test Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I II III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

34 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 L T P C
15ME201 Thermodynamics
2 2 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15MA102
Data Book /
Steam tables
Codes/Standards
Course Category E ENGINEERING SCIENCE
Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

This course provides the basic knowledge about thermodynamic laws

PURPOSE
and relations, and their application to various processes.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
understand
1. Thermodynamic laws and their applications. a e
2. Concept of entropy and availability. a e
3. Properties of steam. a e
4. fuels and combustion a e
5. Thermodynamic relations. a e

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Basic Concepts and First Law of
12
Thermodynamics
Basic concepts, concept of continuum,
1. Microscopic and macroscopic approach. 1 C 1 1,2
Thermodynamic system and surrounding.
Properties of a system, Intensive and
2. extensive, Specific and total quantities, 1 C 1 1,2
Path and point functions.
Thermodynamic process, cycle and
3. equilibrium , Quasi-static, Reversible and 1 C 1 1,2
Irreversible processes
Heat and work transfer, displacement
4. work, flow work and other modes of work, 1 C,D 1 1,2
p-V diagram.
Zeroth law of thermodynamics, concept of
5. 1 C 1 1,2
temperature.

35 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
First law of thermodynamics , energy ,
6. enthalpy, Specific heats , Application of 3 C,D 1 1,2
first law to closed and open systems
Control volume analysis, steady flow
7. 2 C,D 1 1,2
energy equation and its applications.
8. Tutorials on steady flow energy equation. 2 D 1 1,2
Unit - II Second Law of
12
Thermodynamics and Entropy
Limitations of first law, heat reservoir,
9. source, sink, heat engine, refrigerator, 2 C,D 2 1,2
heat pump.
Statements of second law and their
10. 1 C 2 1,2
equivalence.
Carnot cycle, Reversed Carnot cycle,
11. 2 C,D 2 1,2
Carnot theorem.
Tutorials on second law of
12. 2 D 2 1,2
thermodynamics.
13. Clausius theorem, Clausius inequality 1 C 2 1,2
Concept of entropy, T-s diagram, principle
14. 1 C 2 1,2
of increase of entropy
Entropy change of ideal gases, evaluation
15. 2 C,D 2 1,2
of entropy
16. Introduction to exergy. 1 C 2 1,2
Unit - III Properties of Steam and
12
Vapour Power Cycle
17. Steam formation, properties of steam. 1 C 3 1,2
18. Use of steam tables and Mollier chart 1 C 3 1,2
19. Steam processes 1 C 3 1,2
20. Simple Rankine cycle 1 C 3 1,2
21. Tutorials on Simple Rankine cycle 1 D 3 1,2
22. Reheat cycle 1 C 3 1,2
23. Tutorials on Reheat cycle. 2 D 3 1,2
24. Regenerative cycle 1 C 3 1,2
25. Tutorials on Regenerative cycle 2 C,D 3 1,2
26. Dryness fraction measurements 1 C 3 1,2
Unit - IV Fuels and Combustion 12
27. Types of fuel, properties of fuels. 2 C 4 1,2
28. Calorimeters. 2 C 4 1,2
36 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Combustion equations: Theoretical and
29. 2 C,D 4 1,2
excess air requirement
30. Tutorials on combustion. 2 D 4 1,2
Volumetric analysis and gravimetric
31. 2 C,D 4 1,2
analysis
Tutorials on Volumetric and weight
32. 1 C 4 1,2
analysis
33. Exhaust gas analysis. 1 D 4 1,2
Unit - V Thermodynamic Relations 12
34. Maxwell equations. 1 C,D 5 1,2
Tds equations, general relations for dh and
35. 2 C,D 5 1,2
du.
36. Relations for Cp and Cv 1 C,D 5 1,2
37. Clausius-Clapeyron equation 2 C,D 5 1,2
38. Joule Thomson coefficient 2 C,D 5 1,2
Gas mixtures , Dalton’s law of partial
39. 2 D 5 1,2
pressures
40. Properties of Gas mixtures- Tutorials 2 D 5 1,2
41.
Total 60

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Rajput R.K, “Thermal Engineering”, Laxmi Publications, 10 th Edition, New Delhi,
2015.
2. Mahesh M. Rathore, “Thermal Engineering”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Education private
limited, Reprint 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. Nag.P.K, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education,
New Delhi, 2013.
4. Yunus.N.J, Cengel.A, and Michael Boles, “A., Thermodynamics – An Engineering
Approach, 8th Edition”, Tata McGraw Hill- Education, 2015.
5. Kothandaraman.C.P, Domkundwar.S, Anand Domkundwar, “A Course in Thermal
Engineering”, Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P) Ltd., 2010.
6. Michael Moran.J, and Howard Shapiro.N, “Fundamentals of Engineering
Thermodynamics”, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2000.
7. William Z. Black, James G. Hartley, “Thermodynamics”, 3rd edition Pearson, 2010.

37 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15ME204 Machines and Mechanisms
2 2 0 3
Co-requisite: Nil
Prerequisite: 15ME102
Data Book /
Nil
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE DESIGN ENGINEERING
Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To expose the students to learn the fundamentals of various laws

PURPOSE
governing rigid bodies and its motions.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
Know the basics of mechanism and perform kinematic
1. a c e
analysis.
Calculate the gas forces developed in an engine and
2. a c e
use the excess energy for different applications.
Balance rotating and reciprocating masses in
3. a c e
engines.
Construct various cam profiles based on follower
4. a c e
motion and perform kinematic analysis.
Deduce the number of teeth in gears and torque
5. transmitted in epicyclic gear trains. Apply gyroscopic a c e
couple in different transportation vehicles.

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Mechanisms 14
Introduction to mechanism and its elements.
1. Degrees of freedom, its application in different 2 C-D 1 1,2
mechanism
Four Bar Chain, Grashof’s law, Kutzback’s and
2. 1 C-D 1 1,2
Gruebler’s criterion
38 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Inversion of kinematic chain: Four bar chain,
3. 2 C-D 1 1,2
Single and double slider crank chain
Velocity analysis of Four bar mechanism by
4. 1 C-D 1 1,2
relative velocity (RV) method
Tutorial on velocity analysis of single slider
5. 2 C-D 1 1,2
crank mechanism
6. Tutorial on velocity analysis of six bar linkages 1 C-D 1 1,2
Acceleration analysis of Four bar mechanism
7. 1 C-D 1 1,2
by relative velocity method
Tutorial on acceleration analysis of single
8. 2 C-D 1 1,2
slider crank and six bar linkages
Instantaneous centre (IC) method, Kennedy’s
9. 1 C-D 1 1,2
theorem
Tutorial on velocity analysis for different
10. 1 C-D 1 1,2
mechanisms by IC method
Unit - II Force Analysis and Flywheels 12
11. Inertia forces, D-Alembert’s principle 1 C-D 2 1,2
Velocity and acceleration of the reciprocating
12. 1 C-D 2 1,2
parts in engines
Tutorial on derivation and calculation of gas
13. 2 C-D 2 1,2
forces
14. Dynamically equivalent systems 1 C-D 2 1,2
Tutorial on determination of equivalent system
15. 1 C-D 2 1,2
for connecting rod
Turning moment diagram (TMD) for different
16. 1 C-D 2 1,2
engines
Fluctuation of energy(E), coefficient of
17. 1 C-D 2 1,2
fluctuation of energy
Tutorial on calculation of E using TMD and
18. 2 C-D 2 1,2
torque equations
19. Tutorial on flywheel applications 2 C-D 2 1,2
Unit - III Balancing 12
Need for balancing, Static and dynamic
20. 1 C-D 3 1,2
balancing of rotating masses
Tutorial on balancing of several masses
21. rotating in same plane by analytical and 1 C-D 3 1,2
graphical methods
22. Construction of force and couple polygon 1 C-D 3 1,2

39 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Tutorial on balancing of several masses
23. rotating in different planes using couple and 2 C-D 3 1,2
force polygon
24. Partial balancing of reciprocating masses 1 C-D 3 1,2
Tutorial on effects of partial balancing in
25. 2 C-D 3 1,2
locomotives
26. Balancing of in-line engines 2 C-D 3 1,2
27. Balancing of V engines 1 C-D 3 1,2
28. Balancing of radial engines 1 C-D 3 1,2
Unit - IV CAMS 10
29. Cam terminology, types of cams and followers 1 C-D 4 1,2
Types of follower motion and its derivatives,
30. 1 C-D 4 1,2
under cutting
Displacement, velocity and acceleration for
31. 1 C-D 4 1,2
different follower motion
Tutorial on construction of cam profile for
32. 2 C-D 4 1,2
radial follower with different motion
Tutorial on construction of cam profile for
33. 2 C-D 4 1,2
offset follower with different motion
34. Cams with special contours 1 C-D 4 1,2
Tutorial on velocity and acceleration for cams
35. 2 C-D 4 1,2
with specified contours
Unit - V Gear, Gear Trains and Gyroscopes 12
36. Gear terminology, types, law of gearing 1 C-D 5 1,2
Tutorial on path of contact, arc of contact,
37. 2 C-D 5 1,2
sliding velocity
Minimum number of teeth, Interference and
38. 1 C-D 5 1,2
under cutting
39. Gear train, types and applications 1 C-D 5 1,2
Tutorial on velocity ratio, torque calculations in
40. 2 C-D 5 1,2
epicyclic gear train
41. Introduction to automobile differential 1 C-D 5 1,2
Gyroscopic forces, couple, precessional
42. 1 C-D 5 1,2
angular motion
43. Gyroscopic effects on aeroplane and ship 1 C-D 5 1,2
Tutorial on gyroscopic effect on two and four
44. 2 C-D 5 1,2
wheelers
Total contact hours 60

40 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. No. TEXT BOOKS
S SRatan, “Theory of Machines”, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private
1.
Limited, Fourth Edition, ISBN 9789351343479, 2015.
Thomas Bevan, “The Theory of Machines”, Pearson India Education
2.
Services Pvt. Ltd., Third Edition, ISBN 9788131729656, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
John J. Uicker, Gordon R. Pennock, Joseph E. Shigley, “Theory of Machines
3. and Mechanisms”, Oxford University Press, Fourth Edition, ISBN:
9780199454167, 2014.
Rao. J. S, “The Theory of Machines Through Solved Problems”, New Age
4.
International (P) Ltd., Publishers, New Delhi, First reprint, 2012.
Ghosh.A, and Mallick.A.K, “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines”, Affiliated
5.
East–West Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 1988.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In- Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
Quiz Total
semester tool test I test II test III Test
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 05% 05% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15ME205 Fluid Mechanics
2 2 0 3
Co-requisite: Nil
Prerequisite: 15MA102
Data Book /
Nil
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE THERMAL ENGINEERING
Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To familiarize with the concepts of fluid mechanics and hydraulic

PURPOSE
machines.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES
On the completion of the course, the students are able to
STUDENT OUTCOMES
1. Understand the properties of the fluid. a e
2. Solve the fluid flow problems. a e

41 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
3. Apply the mathematical techniques for practical
a e
flow problems.
4. Understand the energy exchange process in fluid
a e
machinery.
5. Understand the boundary layer theory. a e

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Properties of Fluids and Fluid
12
Statics
Properties of fluids: density, specific weight, C
1. specific volume, specific gravity, vapours 1 1 1,2
Pressure.
Viscosity: Dynamic and Kinematic viscosity, C
2. Newton’s law of viscosity, factors affecting 1 1 1,2
viscosity.
Types of fluids, Tutorial- Problems on fluid C, D
3. 2 1 1,2
properties
Surface tension, compressibility and bulk C, D
4. 1 1 1,2
modulus concepts.
5. Fluid statics- Pascal’s law, Hydrostatic law. 2 C, D 1 1,2
Manometry: Types of manometers, C, D
6. 3 1 1,2
Piezometer, U-tube Manometer
7. Problems on manometers. 2 C, D 1,2
Unit - II Fluid Kinematics and Dynamics 12
Types of flow, Lagrangian and Eulerian C
8. approach, velocity and acceleration of fluid 2 2 1,2
particle.
Tutorial problems on velocity and D
9. 2 2 1,2
acceleration of fluid particle
Fluid flow pattern: Stream line, streak line, C
10. 1 2 1,2
path line
11. Continuity equation 2 C, D 2 1,2
Fluid dynamics: Euler’s equation of motion, C
12. 1 2 1,2
Bernoulli’s Equation
Applications of Bernoulli’s equation in flow C, D
13. 3 2 1,2
measurement Devices: Venturimeter.
14. Orifice meter , Pitot tube, nozzle flow meter 1 C, D 2 1,2
15. Impulse momentum equation. 2 C, D 2 1,2

42 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - III Dimensional Analysis and Flow
15
Through Pipes
Dimensional analysis: Dimensions, C
16. 1 3 1,2
dimensional homogeneity.
Rayleigh method, Buckingham’s Pi- C, D
17. 3 3 1,2
theorem, non-dimensional analysis.
Model analysis: Advantages and C
applications of model testing, similitude,
18. dimensionless numbers: Reynold’s number, 1 3 1,2
Froude’s number, Euler’s number, Weber
number, Mach number.
19. Reynold’s model law – Problems 1 C, D 3 1,2
20. Froude’s model law – Problems 1 C, D 3 1,2
Euler’s model law, Weber model law and C
21. 1 3 1,2
Mach model law
Laminar and Turbulent flow, Reynold’s C, D
22. experiment, Flow through circular pipes – 2 3 1,2
Hagen Poiseuille law.
Turbulent flow – Derivation of Darcy C, D
23. Weisbach equation, Tutorial – Problems on 1 3 1,2
Darcy equation.
Minor loss due to sudden enlargement, C, D
24. sudden contraction, inlet and exit of pipes, 2 3 1,2
problems.
Flow through pipes in series and parallel – C, D
25. 2 3 1,2
problems.
Unit - IV Hydraulic Machines 12
Hydraulic turbines- classification, Impulse C
26. 1 4 1,2
and reaction turbine.
Design parameters and performance of C, D
27. 2 4 1,2
Pelton turbine.
Design parameters and performance of C, D
28. 2 4 1,2
Francis turbine.
Design parameters and performance of C, D
29. 2 4 1,2
Kaplan turbine
Classification of pumps; Positive- C, D
30. 2 4 1,2
displacement and non-positive pumps.

43 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Centrifugal pump, Performance curves and C, D
31. 2 4 1,2
velocity triangles
Cavitations in pumps, Thomas cavitation C, D
32. 1 4 1,2
parameter.
Unit - V Boundary Layer Theory 9
Boundary layer theory: laminar and C
33. 1 3 1,2
turbulent boundary layer over a flat plate.
Displacement, Momentum, Energy C, D
34. 2 3 1,2
thickness: derivations and problems.
35. Momentum integral equation derivation 2 C 3 1,2
Separation of flow over bodies: stream lined C, D
36. 2 3 1,2
and bluff bodies, Flow over cylinders.
Aerofoil description, definition of parameters C, D
37. involved in aerofoil, velocity and pressure 2 3 1,2
acting over the aerofoil
Total contact hours 60
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Rajput.R.K, “A text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”,
S.Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. Bansal.R.K, “A text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics Machines”, Laxmi
publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 9th Edition, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. White.F.M, “Fluid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 7th Edition, New Delhi, 2011.
4. Streeter.V.L, and Wylie.E.B, “Fluid Mechanics”, McGraw Hill,5th Edition 1984.
5. Modi P.N, & Seth S.M, “Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics”, Standard Book
House, New Delhi, 15th edition, 2002.
6. Shiv Kumar, “Fluid Mechanics & Fluid Machines: Basic Concepts &
Principles”, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
7. Yunus A Cengel& John M. Cimbala, Fluid Mechanics, Tata McGraw Hill
Edition, New Delhi, 3rd Edition2014.
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
44 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Manufacturing Technology for Automotive L T P C
15AE201J
Engineers 3 0 2 4
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core Manufacturing Engineering
Course designed by Department Of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To acquire knowledge of various manufacturing processes and machine

PURPOSE
tools and also familiarize the process parameters and coating techniques.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
Recommend appropriate part manufacturing
1. processes when provided a set of functional a
requirements and product development constraints.
Fabricate basic parts and assemblies using powered
2. a c
and non-powered machine shop equipments.
Solve problems on cutting forces, tool life and
3. a c e
analytical methods of estimating cutting temperature

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
Hours I-O
Unit - I Introduction to 09
Manufacturing and Casting
Process
1. Introduction to manufacturing- 1 C 1 1
examples of manufactured products,
global competitiveness and
manufacturing cost, environmentally
conscious design and manufacturing
, organization for manufacture
2. Material properties , material 1 C 1 1
selection, selecting manufacturing
processes
3. Casting introduction, pattern 1 C 1 1
material, types, allowances
4. Expandable mold- sand, shell, 2 C 1 1
plaster, ceramic and investment
45 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
Hours I-O
5. Permanent mold casting – Slush, 2 C 1 1
pressure, die, centrifugal, squeeze
Core – core making.
6. Design of runner, riser, gating and 1 C,D 1 1
sprue
7. Solidification time, shrinkage 1 C,D 1 1
allowance and casting defects
Unit - II Shaping and Forming 8
Processes
8. Forging – Types of presses and 1 C 2 3,5
hammers , Forging processes
9. Forging loads calculation and 1 C,D 2 3,5
Forging defects
10. Rolling –Rolling of blooms, billets, 1 C 2 3,5
slabs and sheet, types of rolling
mills, Forces and geometrical
relationship in rolling and rolled
defects
11. Extrusion process, hot and cold 1 C 2 3,5
extrusion, types and defects
12. Wire and tube drawing, Drawing 1 C,D 2 3,5
force calculation and Defects
13. Sheet Metal Operations – Shearing, 1 C 2 3,5
Slitting, fine blanking, Nibbling,
Tailor welded blanks, perforating
14. Theory of bending, types of bending 1 C,D 2 3,5
operation, bending load calculations,
bending defects.
15. Stretch forming, Deep drawing, 1 C 2 3,5
Ironing, Seaming and Spinning
process
Unit - III Machining of Axi- 8
Symmetrical Components
16. Mechanics of chip formation and 1 C 3 2
Types of chips
17. Calculation of cutting force, power, 1 C,D 3 2
temperatures in cutting
18. Cutting tool materials ,Tool 1 C,D 4 2
signature for single point and multi
46 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
Hours I-O
point cutting Tool and Tool life
calculation
19. Types of lathe machines , 1 C 4 2
specifications and chip collection
systems
20. Work holding devices, Cutting fluids 1 C 4 2
and Machinability
21. External Surface machining and 2 C 4 2
Internal Surface machining
22. Design consideration in turning 1 C,D 4 2
operations, Material Removal Rate
and cutting forces
23. Unit - IV Machining of Prismatic 8
Components and Gear
Manufacturing
24. Milling machines and types 1 C 4 3
25. Work holding devices and Milling 1 C 5 3
cutters
26. Milling Operations 1 C 4 3
27. Operating Parameters – cutting 1 C 4 3
speed, feed, depth of cut
28. Material removal rate, Accuracy and 1 C,D 4 3
surface finish
29. Machining time calculation 1 C,D 4 3
30. Gear hobbing and gear shaping 1 C 4 3
machines
31. Tooling and selection of cutting 1 C 4 3
parameters
Unit - V Surface Finishing and 8
Treatments
32. Grinding machines and types - 1 C 4 4
surface, cylindrical, internal and
centerless grinder
33. Specification of grinding wheels 1 C 4 4
34. Operating parameters - accuracy, 1 C 4 4
surface finish attainable by various
processes
35. Lapping- Introduction, Processes, 1 C 4 4

47 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
Hours I-O
Automotive Applications
36. Honing- Introduction, Processes, 1 C 4 4
Automotive Applications
37. Super finishing process- 1 C 4 4
Introduction, Processes, Automotive
Applications
38. Protective and decorative coatings- 2 C 4 4
Introduction, Processes, Automotive
Applications.
39. Cycle test-I 1
40. Cycle test-II 2
41. Surprise test 1
Total Contact Hours 45

Sl. Contact
Description Of Experiments (Practical) C,D,I,O IOs Reference
No. hours
Introduction- lathe machine, plain turning, Step
1. turning & grooving (Including lathe 4 C,I,O 4 4
mechanisms, simple problems).
Taper turning-compound rest/offset method &
2. Drilling using lathe (Including Drilling feed 4 I,O 4 4
mechanism, Twist drill nomenclature).
External threading-Single start, (Including
3. 2 I,O 4 4
Thread cutting mechanism-simple problems)
4. Eccentric turning-Single axis 2 I,O 4 4
Shaping-V-Block (Including Shaper quick
5. 2 I,O 4 4
return mechanism).
6. Grinding-Cylindrical /Surface/Tool & cutter 2 I,O 4 4
Slotting-Keyways (Including Broaching tool
7. 2 I,O 4 4
nomenclature and Slotter mechanism).
Milling- Spur gear (Including Milling
8. 4 I,O 4 4
mechanism, simple problems)
9. Drilling operations 2 I,O 4 4
Application oriented products using above
10. 6 I,O 4 4
experiments.
Total Contact Hours 30

48 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
Serop Kalpakjian and Steven Schmid, “Manufacturing Engineering and
1.
Technology”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2005
Mikel P Groover, “Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing”, John Wiley &
2.
Sons, New Delhi, 2007.
3. Reference Books/Other Reading Material
P N Rao, "Manufacturing Technology - Machining and Machine Tools", Tata
4.
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2000.
Sharma P C, “A Text Book of Production Technology - Manufacturing
5.
Processes”, S Chand & Company, New Delhi, 2007.
Nagpal G R, “Metal Forming Processes”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
6.
2000.

Course Nature Theory + Practical

Assessment Method – Theory Component (Weightage 50%)
In- Assessment Cycle test I Cycle Cycle Surprise Quiz Total
semester tool test II Test III Test
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

Assessment Method – Practical Component (Weightage 50%)

In- Assessment Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model Total
semester tool Voce examination
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%

Analog and Digital Circuits for Automotive L T P C

15AE208
Application 3 0 0 3
Co-requisite:
Prerequisite: Nil
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

49 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 To get exposed to use of analog and digital circuits that are essential
PURPOSE
for Automotive Application
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Acquire basic knowledge about BJT,MOS based
a b
amplifiers
2. Know the working of oscillators, Multivibrator circuits a b c e
3. Impart the techniques of minimizing digital logic circuits a b c e
4. Design and implement combinational circuits for
a b c e
different digital applications
5. Design and implement digital sequential circuit a b c e

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Introduction to Analog
9
Circuits
1. Introduction to Analog circuits 1 C 1 1
2. BJT Small signal Model 1 C,D 1 1
3. CMOS Circuit Model 1 C,D 1 1
4. Biasing Circuits 2 C,D 1 1
5. MOS amplifiers and types 1 C,D 1 1
6. Frequency response of amplifiers 1 C,D 1 1
7. Differential amplifiers 1 C,D 1 1
Unit - II Oscillators,Wave Shaping
9
and Multi Vibrator Circuits
8. Oscillator, Analysis of LC oscillator 1 C 2 1,4
Active RC,RL Filters,RC,RL C,D
9. 1 2 1,4
integrator, Differentiator Circuits
Diode-Clippers,Diode C,D
10. 1 2 1,4
comparator,Clampers
11. UJT-Sawtooth Waveform Generator 1 C,D 2 1,4
12. Astable, Monostable Multivibrators 1 C,D 2 1,4
Bistable MultiVibrators,Schmitt trigger C,D
13. 2 ,2 1,4
circuits
Unit - III Digital Logic Gates and
9
Minimization Techniques
AND,OR,NOT,NAND,NOR,EX- C,D
14. OR,EX-NOR,Logic circuit 2 3 2,3
implementation
15. TTL,CMOS Logic 1 C,D 3 2,3
50 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Boolean Postulates,Demorgan C,D
16. 2 3 2,3
Theorem
17. Min term,Max term,POS,SOP form 2 C,D 3 2,3
18. K-MAP and Don’t care conditions 2 C,D 3 2,3
Unit - IV Combinational Circuits 9
Design Procedure-Half adder, Full C,D
19. 1 3 2,3
adder
20. Half Subtractor,Full Subtractor 1 C,D 3 2,3
21. Carry look ahead adder 1 C,D 3 2,3
22. Serial adder/Subtractor 1 C,D 3 3
23. BCD adder,Multiplexer,Demultiplixer 1 C,D 3 3
24. Decoder,Encoder 1 C,D 3 3
25. Parity Checker,Parity Generator 1 C,D 3 3
26. Code Convertor 1 C,D 3 3
Unit - V Sequential Circuits and
9
Memory Devices
Latches,Flip-flops –SR,JK,D,T C
27. 1 4 3
characteristic table and Equation
28. Asynchronous Counters 1 C,D 4 3
Synchronous Counters, C,D
29. 1 4 3
Programmable Counters
30. Registers,Shift Registers 1 C,D 4 3
Universal Shift Register,Sequence C,D
31. 1 4 3
Generator
Classification of Memories – C,D
32. 1 4 2,3
RAM,ROM,PROM,EPROM,EEPROM
33. RAM,ROM Organization 1 C,D 4 3
PLA VS PLD –combinational circuit C,D
34. 1 4 3
implementation
35. Introduction to FPGA 1 C 4 3
36. Cycle Test 1 1
37. Cycle Test 2 2
38. Surprise Test 1
Total contact hours 45

51 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. David A.Bell “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Oxford Higher Education Press,
5th Edition, 2010
2. M. Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,
2008 / Pearson Education (Singapore) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Donald P.Leach and Albert Paul Malvino, “Digital Principles and Applications”,
6th Edition, TMH, 2006.
4. Sedra and Smith, “Micro Electronic Circuits”; Sixth Edition, Oxford University
Press, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
5. Millman and Halkias. C., Integrated Electronics, TMH, 2007.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise Tota
In- Quiz
tool test I test II Test III Test l
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15ME205L Fluid Dynamics Laboratory
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: 15ME205
Prerequisite: Nil
Data Book /
Moody Charts.
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE THERMAL ENGINEERING
Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To enable the students to acquire knowledge of fluid flow concepts,

PURPOSE
working principles of flow meters, performance of pumps and turbines.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
understand the
1. Working of flow meters. a b e
2. Different forms of energy of flowing fluids. a b e
3. Various losses in pipes. a b e
4. Performance of pumps and turbines. a b e
52 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Sl. Contact C-D-
Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
1. Flow measurement using Venturimeter 2 O 1 1,2
2. Flow measurement using Pitot tube 2 O 1 1,2
3. Flow measurement using Orificemeter 2 O 1 1,2
Flow visualization using Reynolds O
4. 2 2 1,2
apparatus
5. Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem 2 O 2 1,2
Free and forced vortex flow visualization O
6. 2 2 1,2
experiment
7. Impact of jet of water on vanes 2 O 2 1,2
8. Determination of major loss in pipe 2 O 3 1,2
Determination of minor losses in pipe O
9. 2 3 1,2
fittings
10. Performance test on Centrifugal pump 2 O 4 1,2
11. Performance test on Submersible pump 2 O 4 1,2
12. Performance test on Gear pump 2 O 4 1,2
13. Performance test on Reciprocating pump 2 O 4 1,2
14. Performance test on Jet pump 2 O 4 1,2
15. Visualization of cavitation in pipe flow 2 O 4 1,2
16. Performance test on Pelton turbine 2 O 4 1,2,3
17. Performance test on Kaplan turbine 2 O 4 1,2,3
18. Performance test on Francis turbine 2 O 4 1,2,3
Total Contact Hours 30

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. No. REFERENCES
1. Laboratory Manual
2. Bansal. R.K, “A text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, Laxmi
Publications, New Delhi, 9th edition, 2015.
3. Rajput. R.K, “A text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, S.
Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 6th edition, 2015.

Course nature Practical

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model
In- Experiments Record Total
tool Voce examination
semester
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%

53 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Automotive Components and Assembly L T P C
15AE203L
Drawing 0 1 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15ME105L
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category MANUFACTURING
P PROFESSIONAL CORE
ENGINEERING
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To acquire ability in designing and making the assembly of various

PURPOSE
automobile components
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand orthographic projections and drawing
a b k
standards
2. Draw different automotive joints a b k
3. Understand representations of the various
a k
mechanical components
4. Understand geometric, dimensioning and tolerance a d g

Class
Contact
Session lecture/ Title/Details of Chapter C,D,I,O IOs References
hours
Practice
Class Introduction and Orthographic 1 C 1 1
1.
lecture Projection
2. Practice Orthographic Projection 2 C, D 1 1
Class BIS Code of practice for 1 C 1 1
lecture Engineering Drawing: General
principles of presentation,
conventional representation of
3.
dimensioning (7 Types) and
sectioning, threaded parts,
gears, springs and common
features.
Practice Conventional Representation 2 C,D 3 2
4. of Engineering Parts and
Dimensioning
5. Class Abbreviations and symbols 1 C 2 1

54 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Class
Contact
Session lecture/ Title/Details of Chapter C,D,I,O IOs References
hours
Practice
lecture used in technical drawings.
Symbols and method of
indication on the drawing for
surface finish, welding and
riveted joints.
Practice Assembly Drawing of Sleeve 2 C,D 2 2
6. and Cotter Joints and Flange
Coupling
Class Limit system 1 C 2 1
7.
lecture
Practice Assembly Drawing of 2 C,D 3 2
8.
Plummer Block
Class System of Fits -Basic hole 1 C 1 2
9.
lecture systems
Practice Assembly Drawing of 2 C,D 5 2
10.
Clutches (Single)
Class System of Fits - Basic shaft 1 C 1 1
11.
lecture systems
Practice Assembly Drawing of 2 C,D 5 2
12.
Universal Coupling
Class Geometric dimensioning and 1 C 4 3
lecture tolerance. Principles, types and
13.
application of fuel pumps in
automobile engineering.
Practice Assembly Drawing of Fuel 2 C,D 5 2
14.
Pump
Class Study of Nozzles, types, nozzle 1 C 5 1
15. lecture pin, nozzle holder, screw
adjuster
Practice Assembly Drawing of Fuel 2 C,D 5 3
16.
Injector
Class Study of positive displacement 1 C 5 2
lecture type pumps, mounting bracket,
17.
pump body and bushings,
shafts with gear
Practice Assembly Drawing of 2 C,D 5 1
18. Crankshaft with connecting
road and piston.
55 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Class
Contact
Session lecture/ Title/Details of Chapter C,D,I,O IOs References
hours
Practice
Class Study of shell, insulator, central 1 C 5 1
19.
lecture Electrode and Sealing Gasket
Practice Assembly Drawing of 2 C,D 5 4
20.
Crankshaft
Total Contact Hours 30

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Narayana.K.L, Kanniah.P and Venkata Reddy.K, “Machine Drawing”, New
Age International, New Delhi, 2006
2. Gopalakrishnan.K.R, “Machine Drawing”, Subash Publishers, Bangalore,
2000.
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. Sidheswar Kannaiah.N, Sastry.P.V.V.V, “Machine Drawing”, Tata McGraw
Hill, New Delhi, 1997.
4. Bhatt.N.D, “Machine Drawing”, Charotar publishing house, Anand, 1999.
5. Junnarkar.N.D, “Machine Drawing”, First Indian print, Pearson Education
(Singapore) Pvt. Ltd., 2005.
6. “Design Data: Data Book of Engineers”, PSG College of Technology,
Kalaikathir Achchagam
7. Revised IS Codes: 10711, 10712, 10713, 10714, 9609, 11665, 10715, 10716,
11663, 11668, 10968, 11669, and 8000.

Course nature Practical

Assessment Method – Practical Component (Weightage 50%)
Assessment MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model
In- Experiments Record Total
tool Voce examination
semester 50%
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10%
End semester examination Weightage: 50%

56 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 SEMESTER - IV

L T P C
15PD202 Verbal Aptitude
1 0 1 1
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
NA
Codes/Standards
Course Category G GENERAL
Course designed by Career Development Centre
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To gain knowledge, apply skills and aptitude to ace competitive exams

PURPOSE
and placement tests with speed and precision.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, students will be able to
Develop comprehending and interpretative skills
1. i
through fast reading and mind mapping techniques.
Enhance lexical skills through systematic application of
2. concepts and careful analysis of style, usage, syntax, g i
semantics and logic.
Sharpen logical reasoning through skillful
conceptualization, identification of relationships
3. i
between words based on their function, usage and
characteristics.
Hone critical thinking skills by analyzing the arguments
4. with explicit and implicit premises and validating the i j
author’s point of view.

Sl. Contact C-D-

Description of Topic IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
Unit - I Critical Reasoning 7
Overview of the syllabus, Introduction to
1. reasoning and analysis of different parts of 1 C 1 1,2
an argument
Assumption and Strengthening of an 1,
2. 2 C,I,O 1,2
argument 3,4
3. Inference and Weakening of an argument 2 C,I,O 1,3,4 1,2
Conclusion and other minor types of
4. 2 C,I,O 1,3,4 1,2
argument

57 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Sl. Contact C-D-
Description of Topic IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
Unit - II Advanced Level Lexical
6
Enrichment
5. Synonyms 2 I,O 2 1,3,4,5
6. Antonyms 2 I.O 2 1.3.4.5
7. Odd Words 1 C,I 2 1,7,8
8. Idioms and Phrasal Verbs 1 C,I,O 2 1,13
Unit - III Logical and Semantic Analysis 6
9. Word Analogy 2 C,D,I,O 2,3 1,7,8
10. Sentence Completion, Sentence Equivalence 2 I,O 2,3 1,9,10
11. Text Completion 2 I,O 2,3 1,9,10
Unit - IV Syntactic Analysis 5
12. Error Spotting 2 2 I,O 1,7,8
13. Sentence Correction 3 2 I,O 1,6
Unit - V Comprehension Skills 6
14. Sentence Arrangement 1 3 C,D,I 1,7
15. Para Jumble 2 3 C,D,I 1,7,14
16. Reading Comprehension 3 1,4 D,I,O 1,12,14
Total contact hours 30

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Verbal Aptitude :”A Quantum Leap to Empowerment”
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
2. Manhattan “GMAT - Critical Reasoning GMAT Strategy Guide”, 12th Edition
Charles Harrington Elstor, “Verbal Advantage: Ten Easy Steps to a Powerful
3.
Vocabulary”, Large Print, September 2000.
4. Norman Lewis, “Word Power Made Easy”, WR Goyal Publications, 2011
5. GRE “Word List 3861 – GRE Words for High Verbal Score”, 2016 Edition
6. Manhattan “GMAT Sentence Correction Guide”, 5th Edition
R.S.Aggarwal, “A Modern Approach to Verbal & Non-Verbal Reasoning”.
7.
S.Chand Publications, 2010
Thorpe Edgar and Thorpe Showich, ‘Objective English. Pearson Education"’
8.
2012
GRE “Text Completion and Sentence Equivalence Practice Questions”, Vibrant
9.
Publishers, USA, 2013
Green Sharon Weiner M.A & Wolf Ira K.Barron’s New GRE, 19th Edition.
10.
Barron’s Educational Series, Inc, 2011.
58 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
11. Manhattan Prep GRE : Reading Comprehension and Essays, 5th Edition
12. Sujith Kumar, Reading Comprehension for the CAT, Pearson
Sam Phillips, 3000 Idioms and Phrases (English Improvement for Success),
13.
Goodwills Publications, 2014
Sharma Arun, Verbal Ability and Reading Comprehension for the CAT, Mc.Graw
14.
Hill Publication, 2014

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15MA206 Numerical Methods
4 0 0 4
Co-requisite: NOT APPLICABLE
Prerequisite: 15 MA102 (or) 15MA104 (or) 15MA205B
Data Book /
NA
Codes/Standards
Course Category B CORE MATHEMATICS
Course designed by Department of Mathematics
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To acquire analytical ability in solving mathematical problems

PURPOSE
numerically as applied to the respective branches of Engineering.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. To familiarise with numerical solution of equations a e
2. To get exposed to finite differences and interpolation a e
3. To be thorough with the numerical Differentiation and
a e
integration
4. To find numerical solutions of ordinary differential
a e
equations
5. To find numerical solutions of partial differential
a e
equations

59 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Sl. Contact C-D-
Description of Topic IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
Unit - I Curve Fitting and Numerical Solution
of Equations 14
Introduction – Method of Least Squares –
1. 2 C,I 1 1–7
Curve fitting.
Fitting a straight line –Calculation of the sum of
2. 1 C,I 1 1–7
the squares of the residuals.
Fitting a parabola – Calculation of the sum of
3. 2 C,I 1 1–7
the squares of the residuals.
Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental
4. 1 C,I 1 1–7
equations Newton-Raphson method.
5. Bisection method and its applications. 1 C,I 1 1–7
6. Problems using Method of false position. 1 C,I 1 1–7
Solution of system of equations Direct Method -
7. 1 C,I 1 1–7
Gauss Elimination method.
Iterative Methods - Gauss Jacobi method,
8. 2 C,I 1 1–7
Gauss Seidel method.
9. Finding the Eigen values by Power method. 2 C,I 1 1–7
10. More Problems in Power method. 1 C,I 1 1–7
Unit - II Finite Differences and Interpolation 12
Introduction – First and Higher order
differences – Forward differences and
11. 2 C 2 1–7
backward differences (only definitions without
proof).
Central Differences – Shifting operator E –
12. Relations between the operators (only 2 C 2 1–7
definitions without proof).
Interpolation – Newton-Gregory Forward and
13. 2 C,I 2 1–7
Backward Interpolation formulae.
Additional problems using Newton-Gregory
14. 2 C,I 2 1–7
Forward and Backward Interpolation formulae.
Divided differences – Newton’s Divided
15. 2 C,I 2 1–7
difference formula.
Lagrange’s Interpolation formula – Inverse
16. 2 C,I 2 1–7
interpolation.
Unit - III Numerical Differentiation and
Integration 10
17. Introduction to Numerical Differentiation. 1 C 3 1–7

60 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Sl. Contact C-D-
Description of Topic IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
Numerical Differentiation - Newton’s forward
18. and backward differences formulae to compute 2 C,I 3 1–7
first and higher order derivatives.
Applications of Newton’s forward and backward
19. differences formulae to compute first and 2 C,I 3 1–7
higher order derivatives.
20. Introduction - Numerical Integration 1 C,I 3 1–7
Trapezoidal rule – Simpson’s one third rule and
21. 2 C,I 3 1–7
Simpson’s three eighth rules.
More problems using Trapezoidal rule –
22. Simpson’s one third rule and Simpson’s three 2 C,I 3 1–7
eighth rules.
Unit - IV Numerical Solutions of First Order
12
Ordinary Differential Equations
Introduction, Solution by Taylor’s series
23. 2 C,I 4 1–7
method.
Solutions of I order simultaneous differential
24. 1 C,I 4 1–7
equations by Taylor’s series method.
25. Euler’s method and its applications. 1 C,I 4 1–7
Problems in Improved and modified Euler
26. 2 C,I 4 1–7
methods.
Solution by Runge-Kutta method of fourth order
27. 2 C,I 4 1–7
(No proof).
Additional problems using Runge-Kutta method
28. 1 C,I 4 1–7
of fourth order.
Predictor-Corrector Methods - Milne-Thomson
29. 2 C,I 4 1–7
Method.
Predictor-Corrector Methods - Adam’s
30. 1 C,I 4 1–7
Bashforth method.
Unit - V Numerical Solutions of Partial
12
Differential Equations
31. Introduction - Solutions of Elliptic Equations. 1 C,I 5 1–7
Solutions of Laplace Equations by Leibmann’s
32. 2 C,I 5 1–7
Iterative process.
33. Solutions of Poisson Equations. 1 C,I 5 1–7
Solutions of Parabolic equations by Bendre-
34. 2 C,I 5 1–7
Smidth formula.

61 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Sl. Contact C-D-
Description of Topic IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
Solutions of Parabolic equations by Crank-
35. 2 C,I 5 1–7
Nicolson formula.
Solutions of Hyperbolic equations by Explicit
36. 2 C,I 5 1–7
formula.
More problems in Hyperbolic equations using
37. 2 C,I 5 1–7
Explicit formula.
Total Contact Hours 60

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
B.S. Grewal, “Numerical Methods in engineering and science”, Khanna
1.
Publishers, 42nd edition, 2012.
Dr. M.K. Venkataraman, “Numerical Methods in Science and Engineering”,
2.
National Publishing Co., 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. S.S. Sastry, “Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis”, 4th edition, 2005.
E. Balagurusamy, “Computer Oriented Statistical and Numerical Methods –
4.
Tata McGraw Hill”., 2000.
M.K.Jain, SRK Iyengar and R.L.Jain, “Numerical Methods for Scientific and
5.
Engineering Computation”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 4th edition, 2003.
M.K.Jain, “Numerical Solution of Differential Equations”, 2nd edition (Reprint),
6.
2002.
7. P.Kandasamy etal., “Numerical Methods”, S.Chand & Co., New Delhi, 2003.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

62 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Applied Thermal Engineering for Automotive L T P C
15AE204
Engineers 2 2 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15ME201
Data Book / Approved Heat and Mass Transfer data book, Psychometric
Codes/Standards chart and Refrigerant table
Course Category P Professional Core Engine
Course designed by Department of Automobile engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

The students are expected to understand the concept and working of gas
PURPOSE power cycles, engine performance, heat transfer, air compressors,
refrigeration and air conditioning systems.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand various gas power cycles a c e
2. Integrate the basic concepts into various thermal
applications like testing of engine performance, air a c e f
compressor, refrigeration and air conditioning.
3. Enlighten the various mode of heat transfer and their
a e
engineering application

Contact
Session Description of Topic C,D,I,O IOs Reference
hours
1. Unit - I Gas Power Cycles 9
2. Introduction, Air standard cycles,
1 C 1 1,2
Assumptions
3. Otto Cycle, PV,TS Diagram, Efficiency,
2 C,D 1 1,2
MEP, Numerical
4. Diesel Cycle, PV,TS Diagram, Efficiency,
3 C,D 1 1,2
MEP, Numerical
5. Dual Cycle, PV,TS Diagram, Efficiency,
3 C,D 1 1,2
MEP, Numerical
Unit - II Engine Performance 8
6. Performance parameters, BP, FP, IP,
Torque specific fuel consumption, Specific
Energy consumption, volumetric
2 C 2 1,2,3
efficiency, thermal efficiency, mechanical
efficiency, Engine specific weight, and
heat balance
63 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact
Session Description of Topic C,D,I,O IOs Reference
hours
7. Measurement of different engine
1 C 2 1,2,3
Performance Parameters
8. Measurement of FP, Different Methods 1 C 2 1,2,3
9. Numerical related to BP 1 D 2 1,2,3
10. Numerical related to Morse Test 2 D 2 1,2,3
11. Numerical related to heat balance 1 D 2 1,2,3
Unit - III Heat Transfer 8
12. Conduction: One-dimensional Heat
Conduction Plane wall, Cylinder,
Composite walls, Critical thickness of 3 C,D 3 4,5
insulation, Heat transfer through extended
surfaces (simple fins)
13. Convection: Free convection and forced
3 C,D 3 4,5
convection - Internal and external flow.
14. Heat Exchangers: Types of heat
Exchangers - LMTD method and NTU -
2 C,D 3 4,5
Effectiveness - Overall Heat Transfer
Coefficient - Fouling Factors.
Unit - IV Reciprocating Aircompressors
8
& Refrigeration System
15. Introduction of Air Compressor, Types,
Construction and Working of Single acting 1 C 2 1,2
and double acting air compressors
16. Basics of Intercooler, Construction,
1 C 2 1,2
Working - Multi stage Air Compressor
17. Compressor - work required, effect of
clearance volume, volumetric efficiency- 1 C,D 2 1,2
Problems
18. Fundamentals of refrigeration, COP,
1 C 2 1,2
reversed Carnot cycle
19. Simple vapour compression refrigeration
1 C 2 1,2
system
20. Analysis of Vapour Compression
1 C,D 2 1,2
Refrigeration Cycles - Problems
21. Simple vapour absorption refrigeration
1 C 2 1,2
system
22. Desirable properties of an ideal
1 C 2 1,2
refrigerant, Different Types of Refrigerants

64 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact
Session Description of Topic C,D,I,O IOs Reference
hours
Unit - V Psychrometry And Air
8
Conditioning
23. Properties of atmospheric air 1 C 2 1,2
24. Psychrometric chart, relations 1 C 2 1,2
25. Psychrometric Processes, Sensible
heating and cooling, Humidification,
1 C 2 1,2
Dehumidification, BPF for heating and
cooling coils
26. Cooling and dehumidification, heating and
1 C 2 1,2
Humidification
27. Summer and Winter Air conditioning
1 C 2 1,2
system for Various Climatic Conditions
28. Air conditioning - year round air
1 C 2 1,2
conditioning system
29. Introduction to Cooling load calculations 1 D 2 1,2
30. Study of Automotive air conditioning
1 C 2 1,2
systems
31. Cycle test-I 1
32. Cycle test-II 2
33. Surprise test 1
Total Contact Hours 45
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. TEXT BOOK
No.
1. Kothandaraman.C.P, Domkundwar.S, Anand Domkundwar, “A Course in
Thermal Engineering”, Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P) Ltd., 2010.
2. REFERENCE BOOKS
3. RajputR.K, “Thermal Engineering”, Laxmi Publications, 8th Edition, New Delhi,
2010.
4. Rajput R. K, “A textbook of Internal Combustion Engines”, 2nd Edition, Laxmi
Publications (P) Ltd, 2007.
5. Dr. R. C. Sachdeva, “Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer”,
New Age Science Ltd., New Delhi, 2009
6. Kothandaraman.C.P, Subramanyan.S, “Heat and Mass Transfer Data Book”,
New age International, 7th Edition, 2010.

65 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
L T P C
15AE209 Automotive Control Engineering
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite:
Prerequisite:
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

To familiarize about the importance of feedback control in automotive

PURPOSE applications and to develop the knowledge of controller and
compensator design
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand transfer functions and Mathematically
a b c d e k
Model an automotive sub-system
2. Perform time response analysis for standard
a d e k
prototyping system
3. Perform stability analysis for the system under
a b d e k
study
4. Perform frequency analysis for the system under
a b d k
study
5. Design and implement controllers and
a b e k
compensators for the system under study

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Introduction to Feedback
9
Systems
Introduction to feedback system and C
1. various examples of automotive 1 1 1
feedback systems
2. Examples of Automotive feedback 1 C,D 1 1
66 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Systems-ADAS, Engine
Management system
System types-Linear Time invariant C,D
3. systems, Parameter varying system 2 1 1
and Nonlinear system
Impulse response of a system and C,D
4. 1 1 1
transfer function representation
Transfer function of a D.C motor, C,D
Throttle position sensor, Velocity
5. 1 1 1
Sensor, Accelerometer, Gear Train
and Rack-Pinion system
Block diagram algebra and signal C,D
6. 1 1 1
flow graph for system reduction
Introduction to tools for mathematical C,D
7. 2 1 1
modelling and simulation
Unit - II Performance of Feedback
9
Systems
Introduction to time response
8. analysis-Transient response and 1 C 2 2
steady state response
Sensitivity of a feedback system, C,D
9. Test inputs used for feedback 1 2 2
system analysis
Time response analysis of a C,D
10. firstorder prototyping system –Cruise 1 2 2
control model
Time response analysis of second C,D
11. order prototyping system – 3 2 2
Suspension system example
Complex Plane root location and C,D
12. transient response,Steady state 2 2 2
error of feedback control system
Simulation of cruise control example C,D
13. 1 2 1,2
using CACSD tools
Unit - III Stability Analysis of
9
Linear System
Introduction to Concept of Stability- C,D
14. 1 3 1
BIBO Stability
15. Routh –Hurwitz stability criterion 2 C,D 3 1,2
67 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
and its uses in controller parameter
selection
Stability analysis of tracked vehicle C,D,I
16. 1 3 1
turning control.
17. Introduction to Root locus Concept. 1 C 3 1,2
The rootlocus procedure and C,D
18. rootlocus analysis,Controller design 2 3 2
using root locus.
Unit - IV Frequency Response
9
Analysis of Feedback Systems
Sinusoidal excitation and response C,D
19. 1 4 1,2
to a system
Frequency response plots and C,D
20. 1 4 1
performance specification
Bode plot for constant gain, C,D
21. differentiator ,integrator and second 1 4 1,2
order term
Procedure to plot bode diagram – C,D
22. Gain margin,Phase margin and 1 4 1,2
stability conditions
23. Polar plot - Diagram 1 C,D 4 2
Nyquist stability criterion C,D
24. 1 4 2
fundamentals –Nyquist plot
Nyquist criterin for non-minimum C,D
25. 1 4 2
phase system
Frequency response methods using C,D
26. control design software –using 1 4 2
suspension system example
Unit - V Controller Design for
9
Linear Feedback System
Three term Controller – Effect of C
27. Proportional, Integral and 1 5 2
differentiator constants
28. Effect of P,PI,PD,PID controllers 1 C,D 5 2
PID design for an automotive C,D
feedback system and frequency
29. 1 5 2
domain interpretation of PID
controller

68 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Lead compensators,Lag C,D
30. compensators and Lead Lag 1 5 2
compensators
Time domain interpretation of design C,D
31. of phase lead and phase lag 1 5 2
compensation
Lead- lag Compensators design C,D
32. 2 5 2
using frequency domain methods
Pole zero cancellation design-Notch C,D
33. 1 5 2
filter
34. Cycle Test 1 1
35. Cycle Test 2 2
36. Surprise Test 1
Total contact hours 45

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
6. Richard.C.Dorf and Robert.H.Bishop , “Modern Control System” 12th edition
Pearson Prentice Hall,2013.
7. Benjamin.C.Kuo, “Automatic control systems”, Prentice Hall of India, 7th
Edition,1995.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
1. J.Nagrath and M.Gopal, “Control System Engineering”, New Age International
Publishers, 5th Edition, 2007.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

69 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 L T P C
15ME203 Mechanics Of Solids
2 2 0 3
Co-requisite: - Nil -
Prerequisite: 15MA102
Data Book /
- Nil -
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE DESIGN ENGINEERING
Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To familiarize the students with the fundamentals of deformation,

PURPOSE
stresses, strains in structural elements.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Know the concepts of stress and strain a e
2. Analyze the beam of different cross sections for shear
a e
force, bending moment, slope and deflection.
3. Understand the concepts necessary to design the
a e
structural elements and pressure vessels.

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Concept of Stresses and
12
Strains
Concept of stress and strain, Hooke’s
1. law, Tensile, compressive and shear 1 C, D 1 1, 2
stresses, Poisson's ratio.
Elastic constants and their relationship,
volumetric strain, bars of uniform and
2. 1 C, D 1 1, 2
varying sections subjected to single
load and varying loads.
Tutorial on stress, stress, Hooke's law,
elastic constants and volumetric strain,
3. bars of uniform and varying sections 2 C, D 1 1, 2
subjected to single load and varying
loads.
Analysis of bars of composite sections
4. 2 C, D 1 1, 2
& Tutorial.
Concept of Thermal stresses in simple
5. 2 C, D 1 1, 2
and composite bars & Tutorial.
70 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Principal plane, principal stress,
Analytical method: Direct stress in two
6. mutually perpendicular directions 2 C, D 1 1, 2
accompanied by a simple shear stress
& Tutorial.
Mohr’s circle: direct stress in two
7. mutually perpendicular directions with 2 C, D 1 1, 2
and without shear stress & Tutorial.
Unit - II Analysis of Beams 12
Introduction to types of beams and
loads, Shear force and bending
moment diagrams for cantilever beam
8. 2 C, D 2 1, 2
due to pure point load, pure Uniformly
Distributed Load (UDL), pure Uniformly
Varying Load (UVL) & Tutorial.
Shear force and bending moment
diagrams for simply supported beam
9. 2 C, D 2 1, 2
due to pure point load, pure UDL, pure
UVL & Tutorial.
Shear force and bending moment
diagrams for overhanging beam due to
10. 2 C, D 2 1, 2
pure point load, pure UDL, pure UVL &
Tutorial.
Theory of pure bending derivation and
bending stress in simple beams with
11. 2 C, D 2 1, 2
symmetrical and unsymmetrical
sections & Tutorial
Tutorial on bending stress in simple
12. beams with symmetrical and 2 C, D 2 1, 2
unsymmetrical sections & Tutorial.
Derivation of shear stress distribution
in beams of different sections
13. 2 C, D 2 1, 2
(rectangular, circular), symmetrical &
unsymmetrical & Tutorial.
Unit - III Torsion of Shafts 12

71 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Theory of pure torsion, derivation of
shear stress produced in terms of
14. torque in a circular shaft. Strength, 1 C, D 3 1, 2
stiffness of shaft and Torsional rigidity
& power transmitted.
Tutorial on solid shaft, finding the
15. 1 C, D 3 1, 2
dimensions.
Expression for torque in terms of polar
16. moment of inertia in a circular shaft 1 C, D 3 1, 2
subjected to torsion.
Tutorial on hollow shaft, finding
17. dimensions, percentage of material 1 C, D 3 1, 2
savings.
Circular shafts in series and parallel &
18. 2 C, D 3 1, 2
Tutorial.
Concepts on Strain energy due to
19. 2 C, D 3 1, 2
torsion & Tutorial.
Circular shaft subjected to combined
20. 2 C, D 3 1, 2
bending and torsion & Tutorial.
21. Composite Shaft & Tutorial. 2 C, D 3 1, 2
Unit - IV Deflection of Beams 12
Relationship between deflection, slope,
22. radius of curvature, shear force and 2 C, D 2 1, 2
bending moment & Tutorial.
Slope and deflection of cantilever
23. beam with a point load, UDL by Double 2 C, D 2 1, 2
integration method & tutorial.
Slope and deflection of simply
supported beam with a point load, UDL
24. 2 C, D 2 1, 2
by Double integration method &
tutorial.
Slope and deflection of simply
supported beam with an eccentric
25. 2 C, D 2 1, 2
point load, UDL by Macaulay's method
& tutorial.
Slope and deflection of cantilever
beam and simply supported beam with
26. 2 C, D 2 1, 2
point load and UDL by Moment area
method & tutorial.
72 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
27. Castigliano’s theorem & tutorial. 2 C, D 2 1, 2
Unit - V Columns and Cylinders 12
Columns and struts, Members
subjected to combined bending and
28. axial loads, Expression for crippling 2 C, D 3 1, 2
load with different end conditions
based on Euler’s theory & tutorial.
29. Rankine’s theory & tutorial. 2 C, D 3 1, 2
Thin cylindrical shells subjected to
internal pressure, change in
30. 2 C, D 3 1, 2
dimensions of thin cylindrical shells
due to internal pressure & tutorial.
Thin spherical shells subjected internal
pressure, change in dimensions of thin
31. 2 C, D 3 1, 2
spherical shells due to internal
pressure & tutorial.
Lame’s theoryon stresses in Thick
32. 2 C, D 3 1, 2
cylinders & tutorial.
Stresses in compound thick cylinder
33. 2 C, D 3 1, 2
and Shrink fit & tutorial.
Total contact hours Theory / Tutorials: 30 / 30
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Bansal R.K, “A Text Book of Strength of Materials”, Lakshmi Publications Pvt.
Limited, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Rajput R.K, “Strength of Materials”, Fourth Edition ,S. Chand Limited, 2007.
3. Prabhu.T.J, “Mechanics of solids”, Private Publication, 2009.
4. Ferdinand P.Beer, and RusellJohnston.E, ”Mechanics of Materials”, SI Metric
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2011(Hard cover).
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
5. William A. Nash, “Theory and Problems of Strength of Materials”, Schaum's
Outline Series, McGraw Hill International Edition, 3rd Edition, 2007.
6. Srinath.L.S, “Advanced Mechanics of Solids”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
7. Egor P. Popov, “Engineering Mechanics of Solids”, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall of
India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2009.

73 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
8. James M. Gere, “Mechanics of Materials”, Eighth Edition, Brooks/Cole, USA,
2013.
9. Shigley.J.E, “Applied Mechanics of Materials”, International Student Edition,
McGraw HillKoyakushaLimited, 2000.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15ME303 Materials Technology
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Nil
Codes/Standards
MANUFACTURING
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE ENGINEERING
Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To impart knowledge about the behavior of materials and their

PURPOSE
applications.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Acquire knowledge through Phase diagram and control
a c
material properties by heat treatment.
2. Understand on elastic, plastic and fracture behaviour of
a c
engineering materials and its failure mechanism.
3. Select metallic and non-metallic materials for the
a c
various engineering applications.

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Phase Diagram and Heat
1. 9
Treatments
2. Introduction to Solid solutions 1 C 1 7

74 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Basics of Intermediate phases and its C,D 7
3. types, Phase rules and its 1 1
application
Construction of Cooling curves and C 7
4. 1 1
types of cooling curve
Constructing phase diagram from C 7
5. cooling curve and to study phase 1 1
changes in alloys
Interpretation of phase diagrams and C,D 7
6. 1 1
classification of phase diagram
Equilibrium diagrams of Iron and C 7
7. 1 1
Iron–Carbide diagram
Introduction to TTT Diagram, C 7
8. 1 1
construction and its importance
Construction of Ternary phase C 7
9. 1 1
diagrams and its interpretations
Definition of Annealing, Normalizing, C,D
Tempering, Hardening processes
10. 1 1 5
and its effect on hardness and
microstructure.
Unit - II Elastic and Plastic
9
Behaviour
11. Elasticity in metals and polymers 1 C 2 2
12. Mechanism of plastic deformation 1 C 2 2
Role of yield stress in formation of
13. 1 C 2 3
Luders band
Shear strength of perfect and real
14. 1 C 2 3
crystals
Strengthening Mechanisms, Concept
15. of Work Hardening and stages of 1 C 2 3
work hardening
Solid solution strengthening , its
types and factors governing
16. 1 C 2 3
substitutional solubility based on
Hume Rothery’s Rules
Concept of Grain boundary
strengthening and analyzing its
17. 1 C 2 3
effects with grain size, hall-petch
relation.
75 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Fibre, Particle, Particulate and
18. 1 C 2 3
Dispersion strengthening
Effect of temperature, strain and
19. 1 C 2 3
strain rate on plastic behaviour
Unit - III Fracture Behaviour 9
Introduction to fracture, Types of C,D
20. fracture in metals, Griffith’s theory of 1 2 2
brittle fracture, Stress intensity factor
21. Fracture Toughness 1 C.D 2 2
22. Theory of Ductile to brittle transition 1 C 2 2
High temperature fracture, Creep C
23. curve, Effect of creep rate in creep 1 2 2
test
24. Deformation mechanism maps 1 C 2 2
Introduction to Fatigue, S-N curve, C
25. 1 2 2
Low and high cycle fatigue test
Stages of fatigue: Crack initiation and C
26. 1 2 2
propagation mechanisms
27. Fracture of Non-metallic materials 1 C 2 2
Failure analysis, Sources of failure, C
28. 1 2 2
procedure of failure analysis.
Unit - IV Modern Metallic Materials 9
Dual phase alloys properties, its C
29. processing, composition and 1 3 5
application.
Brief introduction on Micro alloyed
steels and High Strength Low alloy
30. 1 C 3 5
(HSLA) steel, its properties and
comparison of strength.
Processing and Characteristics
Transformation induced plasticity
31. 1 C 3 2
(TRIP) steel, its properties and
application
Concept of Maraging steel and
32. 1 C 3 5
Intermetallics, Ni and Ti Aluminides
Introduction to Smart materials its
33. types : piezoelectric material, shape 1 C 3 8
memory alloys and MR fluid

76 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Shape memory alloys and its effect
34. 1 C 3 8
on temperature
Processing of Metallic glasses, its
35. 1 C 3 2
properties and application
Introduction to Quasi crystals and its
36. 1 C 3 9
properties
Concept of Nano crystalline materials
37. 1 C 3 6
and its application
Unit - V: Non Metallic Materials 9
Introduction to Polymeric materials, C
Synthesis of polymers, thermoplastic
38. 1 3 5
and thermoset polymers its
characteristics and application.
Production techniques of fibre and C 3
39. 1 5
foams
Properties and applications of C 3
40. 1 5
engineering polymers
Processing, properties and C 3
41. applications of advanced structure 1 5
ceramics, WC, TiC
Processing, properties and C 3
42. applications of Al2O3, SiC, SI2N4, 1 5
CBN and Diamond
Types and classification of composite C 3
43. materials. Reinforcement and matrix 1 5
material
Production techniques of MMC : Stir C 3
44. casting, Infiltration, Solid state 1 5
forming, PVD and CVD process
Production techniques of PMC: C 3
Injection, Blow, extrusion,
45. thermoforming, Solid state forming. 1 5
Resin transfer molding and
compression molding
Properties and applications of MMC C 3
46. 1 5
and PMC
Total contact hours 45

77 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Flake.C Campbell, “Elements of Metallurgy and Engineering Alloys”, ASM
International, 2008.
2. Dieter.G.E, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 2001.
3. Thomas H. Courtney, “Mechanical Behaviour of Engineering
materials”,McGraw Hill, Singapore, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
4. Flinn.R.A and Trojan.P.K, “Engineering Materials and their applications”, Jaico,
Bombay, 1990.
5. Budinski.K.G and Budinski.M.K, “Engineering Materials Properties
andselection”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2004.
6. ASM Metals Hand book, “Failure analysis and prevention”, Vol: 10, 14thedition,
New York, 2002.
7. R.E.Smallman & A.H.W.Ngan, Physical Metallurgy and Advanced Materials,
7th edition, Elsevier Ltd.
8. Michelle Addington and Daniel Schodek,”Smart Materials and New
Technologies”, Elsevier print, 2005
9. George S. Brady, Henry R. Clauser, Jhon A.Vaccari, Materials Science Hand
Book”,McGraw-Hill, 1997
10. Sidney H Avnar , “Introduction to physical metallurgy”, Tata McGraw-Hill
Education, 2nd edition, 1997
11. William D. Callister, David G. Rethwisch, “Materials Science and Engineering:
An Introduction”, Wiley publication, 8th Edition, 2009.
12. Donald R. Askeland, Wendelin J. Wright , “Science and Engineering of
Materials” , Cengage Learning – U.S.A Publication, 7th Edition, 2011
13. Donald R. Askeland, Wendelin J. Wright , “Essentials of Materials Science &
Engineering” , Cengage Learning – U.S.A Publication, 3rd Edition, 2013

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

78 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 L T P C
15ME203L Strength Of Materials Laboratory
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: 15ME203
Prerequisite: Nil
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE Design Engineering
Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To familiarize the students on conducting various destructive tests for

determining the strength of various materials under externally applied
PURPOSE
loads from the theoretical knowledge gained from Mechanics of
Solids.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the procedures for conducting various
destructive testing methods like impact, A B E K
compression test etc.
2. Learn how to measure hardness of materials and to
A B E K
interpret the same after heat treatment.
3. Determine the Young's modulus using deflection
A B E K
test on beams and tensile test on rods & springs.
4. Compare the fatigue behavior of a notched and un-
A B E K
notched specimen.

Sl. Contact C-D-

Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
1 Tensile test on Mild steel rod. 2 C,D 1,3 1,2,3
Compression test of Concrete cubes and C
2 2 1 1,2,3
cylinders.
Test on open coil and closed coil Helical C
3 2 1,3 1,2,3
springs.
4 Izod & charpy impact test. 2 C 1 1,2,3
5 Torsion test on Graded steels. 2 C 1 1,2,3
Deflection test on beams of different C
6 materials using Maxwell reciprocal 2 1,3 1,2,3
theorem.
7 Double shear test on metallic materials. 2 C 1 1,2,3

79 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Rockwell & Brinell hardness test of C
8 2 1,2 1,2,3
metallic materials.
9 Bend test of metallic rods. 2 C 1 1,2,3
Fatigue testing of materials under notched C
10 2 1,4 1,2,3
and unnotched conditions.
Comparison of mechanical properties of C
11 Unhardened, Quenched and tempered 2 1,2 1,2,3
specimen.
12 Strain measurement on rods and beams. 2 C 1 1,2,3
13 Study on photo elasticity 2 C 1 1,2,3
14 Buckling analysis 2 C 1 1,2,3
15 Creep Test 2 C 1 1,2,3
Total contact hours 30

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
REFERENCES
No.
1. Laboratory Manual
2. Kazimi.S.M.A, “Solid Mechanics”, second revised Edition, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2001.
3. Ferdinand Beer, E. Russell Johnston, Jr., John DeWolf, David Mazurek,
“Mechanics of Materials” McGraw - Hill, New Delhi, Seventh Edition, 2013.

Course nature Practical

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model
In- Experiments Record Total
tool Voce examination
semester
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%

L T P C
15ME303L Materials Technology Laboratory
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: 15ME303
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
MANUFACTURING
P PROFESSIONAL CORE
Course Category ENGINEERING
Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

80 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 To acquire the knowledge of identifying the metals and understanding
PURPOSE
based on microstructure and the metallurgical concepts.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Prepare different metal specimen for identification. C
2. Study and identify the microstructure of metals. C K
3. Understand the heat treatment process and its
C E K
metallurgical changes

Sl. Contact C-D-

Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
A. Study of metallurgical Microscope
B. Specimen preparation for identification
1. of metals/alloys 2 C, I 1 1,2
B1. Specimen mounting press
B2. Hand Polishing B3. Etching
Identification of Plain Carbon steel
2. a)L.C.S b) NORMALISED L.C.S. 2 I,O 1,2 1,2
c)H.C.S. d) NORMALISED H.C.S
Identification of Cast iron :
3. 2 I,O 1,2 1
a) G.C.I b) S.G.I c) M.C.I d) W.C.I
Comparison of Vickers Hardness for heat
treated steel – (HCS) As supplied
4. 2 I,O 3 1,2
b) After Quenching c) After Annealing
d) After Normalization
Determination of hardness using Micro
5. 2 I,O 3 1,2
Vickers Tester
Determination of coating thickness using
6. 2 I,O 1.2 1,2
Image analyzer
Determining the hardness of case
7. 2 I,O 3 1,2
hardened steel
Determination of hardenability for Jominey
8. 2 I,O 3 1,2
End quenched specimen
Identifying the properties of G.C.I and S.G.I
9. 2 I,O 1,2 1,2
using image analyzer
Identification of Steel based alloys : a) Dual
10. Phase steel b) H.S.S c) SPRING 2 I,O 1,2 1,2
STEEL (M.C.S)
Identification of Aluminum based alloys:
11. a) ALUMINIUM ALLOY 2 I,O 1,2 1,2
b) DURAALUMIIUM
81 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Sl. Contact C-D-
Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
Identification of Copper based alloys : a)
12. BRASS b) BRONZE 2 I,O 1,2 1,2
a) BRASS b) BRONZE
Determining the Yield stress, Ultimate
13. Tensile Stress, Breaking Stress for Mild 2 I, O 1,2 1,2
Steel, Ductility and type of fracture
Determining the bending stress using
14. 2 I,O 1,2 1,2
tensometer
15. Wear analysis using Pin-On-Disc 2 I,O 1,2 1,2
Total contact hours 30

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
REFERENCES
No.
1. Laboratory Manual
2. Sidney H Avnar , “Introduction to physical metallurgy”, Tata McGraw-Hill
Education, 2nd edition, 1997
3. Donald R. Askeland, Wendelin J. Wright, “Science and Engineering of Materials” ,
Cengage Learning – U.S.A Publication, 7th Edition, 2011.
4. ASTM standards.
Course nature Practical
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model
In- Experiments Record Total
tool Voce examination
semester
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%

L T P C
15AE375L Minor Project-I
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional
Course designed by Department Of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

82 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 To obtain a hands-on experience in converting a small novel idea /
PURPOSE technique into a working model / prototype involving multi-disciplinary
skills and / or knowledge and working in at team.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To conceptualize a novel idea / technique into a product c
2. To think in terms of multi-disciplinary environment d
To understand the management techniques of
3. k
implementing a project
To take on the challenges of teamwork, prepare a
4. presentation in a professional manner, and document all g
aspects of design work.

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
An Multidisciplinary project to be taken up by
a team of maximum of ten students.
Development of prototype product, a 3D
model, simulation, blueprint for a larger
project and any other development work are 1,2,
C,D,I
permitted. The contribution of the individuals 3,4
in the project should be clearly brought out.
A combined report is to be submitted. A
presentation is to be made for the reviewers
on the work done by the candidate.
Total Contact Hours

Course Nature Project – 100% internal continuous assessment

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In- Assessment tool Refer the table Total
semester Weightage Refer the table below 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%

83 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Assessment
Expected outcome Evaluators Criteria or basis Marks
component
Project A short presentation to be Panel of Viability /
proposal delivered on: reviewers feasibility of the
(Review – I)  A brief, descriptive project project Extent of
title (2-4 words). This is preliminary work
critical! done.
 The 3 nearest competitors
(existing solutions) and
price.
 Team members name,
phone number, email,
department/degree
0
program, and year.
 A description of the product
opportunity that has been
identified. To include:
Documentation of the
market need, shortcomings
of existing competitive
products, and definition of
the target market and its
size.
 Proposed supervisor / guide
Review II  Mission Statement / Panel of Originality, Multi-
Techniques reviewers disciplinary
 Concept Sketches, Design component, clarity
Specifications / Modules & of idea and 20
Techniques along with presentation,
System architecture team work,
 Coding handling Q&A.
Review III  Final Concept and Model / Panel of Originality, Multi-
Algorithm/ Technique reviewers disciplinary
 Drawings, Plans / component, clarity
programme output of idea and
presentation, 50
 Financial Model / costing
 Prototype / Coding team work,
 Final Presentation and handling Q&A.
Demonstration

84 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Final A good technical report Supervisor / Regularity,
technical Guide systematic
Report progress, extent 30
of work and
quality of work
Total 100

L T P C
15AE380L Seminar-I
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To enhance the disseminating skills of the student about the current and
PURPOSE
contemporary research work that is being carried out across the world.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To understand the research methodology adopted by h i j
various researchers
2. To mathematically model a problem, critically analyse b c e
it and adopt strategies to solve
3. To understand and present a well-documented e g
research

85 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Session Description of Topic Contact C-D- IOs Reference
hours I-O
Guidelines for conducting 15xx380L C,D 1,2,3
Seminar for B.Tech ,4
1. Upon registering for the course the
student must identify a sub-domain of
the degree specialization that is of
interest to the student and start
collecting research papers as many as
possible.
2. After collecting sufficient number of
research papers the student must
peruse all the papers, meet the course
faculty and discuss on the salient
aspects of each and every paper.
3. The course faculty, after discussion with
the student will approve TWO research
papers that is appropriate for
presentation.
4. The student must collect additional
relevant reference materials to
supplement and compliment the two
research papers and start preparing the
presentation.
5. Each student must present a 15-minute
presentation on each of the approved
researchTotalpaper
Contactto Hours
the panel of 30
evaluators.
1.
Course nature The presenter must present one
100% internal continuous assessment.
research paper within the first half
Assessment Method (Weightageof the 100%)
In- semester
Assessment(6 weeks) and another
Presentation 1 research
Presentation 2 Total
semesterpaper
tool in the next half of the semester (6
weeks) as per the schedule.
Weightage 50% 50% 100%
2. All other
End students
semester registered
examination for
Weightage : 0%
the course will form the audience.
3. The audience as well as the
evaluators will probe the student with
appropriate questions and solicit response
from the presenter.
4. The presentation will be
evaluated against 7 to 8 assessment
criteria by 4 to 5 evaluators.86 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
5. The score obtained through the
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
presentations of TWO research papers will
be converted to appropriate percentage of
marks.
 L T P C
15AE385L Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs)-I
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To offer students the opportunity to study with the world’s best universities
by integrating select MOOCs in a regular degree programme and
PURPOSE providing students full credit transfer, as per university regulations, if they
earn a “Verified / Completion Certificate” and take a proctored
examination through a secure, physical testing center.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able
To apply the concepts, theories, laws, technologies
1. f h i j
learnt herein to provide engineering solutions.

Online - 100% internal continuous

Course nature
assessment.
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Non-
Proctored /
Assessment proctored /
In- Quiz Assignment Supervised Total
tool Unsupervised
semester Test
Tests
Weightage 25% 25% 10% 40% 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%

Registration process, Assessment and Credit Transfer:

1. Students can register for courses offered by approved global MOOCs platforms
like edX, Coursera or Universities with which SRM partners specifically for
MOOCs.
2. Annually, each department must officially announce, to the students as well as
to the Controller of Examinations, the list of courses that will be recognised and
accepted for credit transfer.
3. The department must also officially announce / appoint one or more faculty
coordinator(s) for advising the students attached to them, monitoring their
progress and assist the department in proctoring the tests, uploading the marks

87 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 / grades, and collecting and submitting the graded certificate(s) to the CoE,
within the stipulated timeframe.
4. Student who desires to pursue a course, from the above department-approved
list, through MOOCs must register for that course during the course registration
process of the Faculty of Engineering and Technology, SRM University.
5. The maximum credit limits for course registration at SRM will include the
MOOCs course registered.
6. The student must periodically submit the marks / grades obtained in various
quizzes, assignments, tests etc immediately to the Faculty Advisor or the
Course Coordinator for uploading in the university’s academic module.
7. The student must take the final test as a Proctored / Supervised test in the
university campus.
8. The student must submit the “Certificate of Completion” as well as the final
overall Marks and / or Grade within the stipulated time for effecting the grade
conversion and credit transfer, as per the regulations. It is solely the
responsibility of the individual student to fulfil the above conditions to earn the
credits.
9. The attendance for this course, for the purpose of awarding attendance grade,
will be considered 100% , if the credits are transferred, after satisfying the
above (1) to (7) norms; else if the credits are not transferred or transferable, the
attendance will be considered as ZERO.

L T P C
15AE490L Industrial Module-I
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

88 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
PURPOSE To impart an insight into the current industrial trends and practices
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able
To obtain an insight into the current industrial trends
1.
and practices
To obtain an insight into the technologies adopted by
2.
industries
To obtain an insight into the technical problems
3. encountered by the industries and the scope for
providing solutions.
4. To network with industry
Contact
Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference
hours
1. He department will identify and shortlist
few emerging topics that are trending in
industry.
2. The department will identify experts from
industry who are willing to deliver modules
on the shortlisted topics.
3. The identified expert will assist the
department in formulating the course
content to be delivered as a 30-hour
module, prepare lectures notes, ppt,
handouts and other learning materials.
4. The department will arrange to get the
necessary approvals for offering the C,D,I,O 1,2,3,4
course, from the university’s statutory
academic bodies well before the actual
offering.
5. The department must officially announce,
to the students as well as to the Controller
of Examinations, the list of courses that
will be offered as industry module.
6. The department must also officially
announce / appoint one or more faculty
coordinator(s) for advising the students
attached to them, monitoring their
progress and assist the department in

89 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact
Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference
hours
proctoring/supervising/assessment the
quizzes, assignments, tests etc, uploading
the marks, attendance etc, within the
stipulated timeframe.
7. The Student who desires to pursue a
course, from the above department-
approved list, must register for that course
during the course registration process of
the Faculty of Engineering and
Technology, SRM University.

8. The maximum credit limits for course

registration at SRM will include the
Industry Module also.
9. All academic requirements of a
professional course like minimum
attendance, assessment methods,
discipline etc will be applicable for this
Industry Module.
10. The course will be conducted on
weekends or beyond the college regular
working hours.
Total Contact Hours 30

100% internal continuous

Course nature
assessment.
Assessment Method – Theory Component (Weightage 50%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage 50%

90 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Semester V
15PD301 Communication & Reasoning Skills L T P C
1 0 1 1
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NA
Codes/Standards
Course Category G GENERAL
Course designed by Department of Career Development Centre
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016
PURPOSE To inculcate professional values and improve employability skills.

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES

At the end of the course, students will be able to
Gain insights on building a winning CV (digital and
LinkedIn profile) in alignment with the employers’
1. g
expectations and creating an impressive self-
introduction video
Actively participate in formal discussions and manifest
2. their professional skills such as leadership, empathy, d g
time management and assertiveness
Foster problem solving and decision making skills
3. through case studies on work ethics, decision making, d g j
and organizational behavior.
Build confidence to encounter the real interview process
4. through formal one-on-one assessment sessions with i g
constructive feedback.
Display expertise on a chosen subject with effective
5. i g
presentation etiquette
S. Contact C-D-I-
Description of Topic IOs Reference
No. hours O
UNIT I: Curriculum Vitae 2
Importance of building a winning CV,
1. 1 C 1 5
Orientation to placement preparation
Do’s and Don’ts of CV, Inputs on LinkedIn
2. 1 C,I,O 1 6
profiling, CV preparation
UNIT II: Group Discussion/Case Study 8

91 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
S. Contact C-D-I-
Description of Topic IOs Reference
No. hours O
Introduction to GD, Importance of GD, SPELT
3. Topics, Do’s & Don’ts of GD, Skills assessed in 1 C 2,3 1,2
GD
Case Study - Definition, Types, Situational
Analysis, Problem Identification, Solution
4. 1 C 2,3
Generation, Prioritization and Recommended
Solution, Action Plan, and Backup Plan.
5. Mock GD & Case Study 2 I,O 2,3
6. GD Assessment 4 I,O 2,3
UNIT III: Talk on Technical Area of
8
Interest/Dream Company Profile/Extempore
Guidelines to effective presentation and
7. 1 C 5 4
discussion of assessment parameters
8. Presentation and assessment 7 I,O 5
UNIT IV: Video Profile 2
Instructions to present an appealing self-
9. introduction video, sample video profile 1 C 1
screening
10. Video profile presentation 1 I,O
UNIT V: Interview Skills & Mock Interview 10
Introduction to formal interview, preliminary
10. preparation, do’s & don’ts, video projection of a 1 C 4 3
sample interview
11. Discussion on FAQs in the interview 1 C,D,I 4 3
Personal Interview sessions & Assessment with
12. 8 I,O 4
feedback
Total contact hours 30
LEARNING RESOURCES
REFERENCE BOOKS
Anand Ganguly, “Group Discussion for Admissions and Jobs”, Pustak Mahal
1.
Publications.
Gerald M. Phillips, Douglas J. Pedersen, “Group Discussion: A Practical Guide
2.
to Participation and Leadership”, Waveland Press
Susan Hodgson, “Brilliant Answers to Tough Interview Questions”, Pearson
3.
Publications.
Asha Kaul, “The Effective Presentation: Talk Your Way To Success”, SAGE
4. Publications

92 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 WEBLINKS
5. https://www.quintcareers.com/curriculum-vitae/
6. http://www.hongkiat.com/blog/professional-linkedin-profile/

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15MA301 Probability And Statistics
4 0 0 4
Co-requisite: NOT APPLICABALE
Prerequisite: 15 MA102 (or) 15MA104 (or) 15MA205B
Data Book / STATISTICAL TABLES
Codes/Standards
Course Category B CORE MATHEMATICS
Course designed Department of Mathematics
by
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To impart analytical ability in solving mathematical problems as

PURPOSE
applied to the respective branches of engineering
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. To apply the basic rules and theorems of probability a e
theory such as Baye’s Theorem, to determine
probabilities that help to solve engineering
problems and to determine the expectation and
variance of a random variable from its distribution.
2. To appropriately choose, define and/or derive
probability distributions such as the Binomial,
Poisson and Normal etc to model and solve a e
engineering problems.
3. To learn how to formulate and test hypotheses a e
about means, variances and proportions and to
draw conclusions based on the results of statistical
tests.

93 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
4. To understand how regression analysis can be a e
used to develop an equation that estimates how
two variables are related and how the analysis of
variance procedure can be used to determine if
means of more than two populations are equal.
5. To understand the fundamentals of quality control a e
and the methods used to control systems and
processes.
Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
UNIT - I Probability & Random Variables 12
1. Introduction to probability concepts, Types 1 1 1-5
of Events, axioms, theorems, C,1
2. Conditional probability, Multiplication 1 1 1-5
theorem, Applications. C,1
3. Characteristics of random variables – 2 1 1-5
Discrete case, Probability Mass function, C,1
Cumulative distribution function,
Applications
4. Characteristics of random variables – 2 C,1 1 1-5
Continuous case, , Probability density
function, Cumulative distribution function,
Applications
5. Central and Raw Moments 2 C,1 1 1-5
6. Expectation, variance, Applications 2 C,1 1 1-5
7. Moment generating function of discrete and 2 C,1 1 1-5
continuous random variable
UNIT - II Theoretical Distributions 12
8. Discrete distribution: Binomial distribution – 2 C,1 2 1-5
MGF, Mean, Variance, Applications of
Binomial distribution, Fitting a binomial
distribution
9. Poisson distribution – MGF, Mean, 2 C,1 2 1-5
Variance, Applications of Poisson
distribution, Fitting a poisson distribution
10. Geometric distribution – MGF, Mean, 1 C,1 2 1-5
Variance, Memoryless Property ,
Applications of Geometric distribution
11. Continuous distribution: Uniform distribution 2 C,1 2 1-5
– MGF, Mean, Variance & applications
94 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
12. Exponential distribution - MGF, Mean, 2 C,1 2 1-5
Variance, Memoryless Property Applications
of Exponential distribution
13. Normal distribution – MGF, Mean, Variance 2 C,1 2 1-5
14. Applications of Normal distribution and 1 C,1 2 1-5
Problems
UNIT- III Testing of Hypothesis 12
15. Introduction to sampling distributions, 1 C,1 3 1-5
population and sample, null hypothesis and
alternative hypothesis, Testing of
hypothesis, level of significance, critical
region, Procedure for testing of hypothesis
16. Large sample test- test for single proportion, 2 C,1 3 1-5
two proportions
17. Large sample test- test for single mean, two 2 C,1 3 1-5
means
18. Small sample tests – ‘t’ test for a single 1 C,1 3 1-5
mean
19. ‘t’ test for the difference of means, ‘t’ test for 2 C,1 3 1-5
the paired observations
20. F test – Test of significance of the difference 2 C,1 3 1-5
between population variances
21. Chi square test for goodness of fit, 2 C,1 3 1-5
independence of Attributes
UNIT – IV Correlation, Regression and 12
Analysis of Variance
22. Correlation and Properties, Karl pearsons 2 C,1 4 1-5
correlation coefficient
23. Rank correlation coefficient 2 C,1 4 1-5
24. Linear Regression lines and Properties, 2 C,1 4 1-5
regression coefficient, Problems
25. Analysis of Variance – One way 2 C,1 4 1-5
Classification
26. Two way Classification 2 C,1 4 1-5
27. Introduction to Non parametric Test – 2 C,1 4 1-5
Wilcoxon signed rank test(one sample test)
– Wilcoxon Mann-Whitney rank test (Two
sample test)

95 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
UNIT- V Statistical Quality Control 12
28. Introduction and Process Control 2 C,1 5 1-5
29. Control Charts for X and R, 2 C,1 5 1-5
30. Control Charts for X and S. 2 C,1 5 1-5
31. p chart 2 C,1 5 1-5
32. np chart 2 C,1 5 1-5
33. c chart 2 C,1 5 1-5
Total contact hours 60
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Veerarajan T., Probability, Statistics and Random Processes, Tata McGraw Hill,1st
Reprint 2004.
2. S.C. Gupta and V.K. Kapoor, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics, 9th
extensively revised edition, Sultan Chand & Sons, 1999.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. Ross. S., “A first Course in Probability”, Fifth Edition, Pearsons Education, Delhi
2002.
4. Johnson. R. A., “Miller & Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers”’ Sixth
Edition, Pearson Education, DSelhi, 2000.
5. Walpole, R. W., Myers, R. H. Myers R. S. L. and Ye. K, “Probability; and Statistics
for Engineers and Scientists”, Seventh Edition, Pearsons Education, Delhi, 2002.
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
L T P C
15AE310 Automotive Transducers And Signal Conditioners
2 0 0 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15AE208
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

96 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 To expose the students to the use of actuators, sensors and signal
PURPOSE
conditioning for automotive applications.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Know the importance and use of sensors and actuator
a b d
in vehicular applications
2. Understand the basic principles and working of
a b d
sensors
3. Control an actuator for automotive application a b
4. Design a signal conditioning circuit using operational
a b c
amplifier
5. Design and implement an analog to digital conversion
a b c
circuit

Session Description of Topic Contact C- IOs Reference

hours D-I-
O
Unit I: Introduction to Sensing and 5
Actuation
1. Basic Considerations and Definitions. 1 C 1 1,4
2. Classification of Sensor-Input Signals and 1 C 1 1,4
Signal Conversion.
3. Signal Extraction and Sensor Output Signals. 1 C,D 1 1,4
4. Introduction to actuators and Classification. 1 C,D 1 1
5. Actuator as a System Component and 1 C,D 1 1
Variables to be Controlled.
Unit II: Automotive Sensors 6
6. Accelerometers, Yaw-Rate Sensors, Tire- 1 C,D 2 1,4
Pressure Sensors.
7. Temperature Sensors, Mass-Flow Sensors, 1 C,D 2 1,4
Radar Sensors.
8. Video Sensors, Wheel-Speed Sensors, Cam 1 C,D 2 1,4
and Crank-Angle Sensors
9. Steering-Angle Sensors, Force and Torque 1 C,D 2 1,4
Sensors, Light Sensors
10. Rain Sensors, Chemical Sensors for Oxygen 2 C,D 2 1,4
Detection and Air/Fuel Ratio, Electric-Current
Sensors
Unit III: Automotive Actuators 7
11. Engine control actuators, Fuel injector 1 C,D 3 1,3

97 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Session Description of Topic Contact C- IOs Reference
hours D-I-
O
(Solenoid, Piezo electric type)
12. Ignition coil operation, EGR Actuator 1 C,D 3 1,3
13. Electric actuators- Relays, Reed switch. 1 C,D 3 1,3
14. Electric motor – D.C motor, Brushless D.C 2 C,D 3 1,3
Motor, Stepper Motor and Servomechanism
15. Pulse width Modulated signal and H-bridge 2 C,D 3 1,3
device for speed and direction control.
Unit IV: OP-AMP Characteristics and 7
Application
16. Ideal OP-AMP Open Loop and feedback in 1 C 4 1,2
OP-AMP operation, Inverting and non-
inverting amplifier
17. Voltage follower and Differential amplifiers, 1 C,D 4 1,2
CMRR
18. IC 741, OP-Amp D.C characteristics 1 C 4 2,5
19. Basic OP-AMP applications, Instrumentation 1 C,D 3 2,5
amplifier
20. Sample and Hold Circuit V-I and I-V 1 C,D 3,4 2,5
convertor,
21. Multiplier, Divider, Integrator and Differentiator 1 C,D 4 2,5
22. Filters –Types and Introduction to digital filters 1 C,D 4 2
Unit V: Waveform generators and Analog – 5
Digital Convertors
23. Introduction to Comparator and its 1 C 4,5 2
Applications
24. Regenerative comparator and square wave 1 C 5 2
generator (Astable multivibrator)
25. Basic DAC techniques –Weighted resistor,R- 1 C 5 2
2R ladder and inverted R-2R ladder
26. ADC-Direct Type ADC’s –Flash ADC, 2 C,D 5 2
Successive approximation ADC
Total contact hours 30

98 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. J.Marek “Sensors Applications Volume 4 Sensors for Automotive Applications”
Volume 4, WILEY-VCH GmBH & Co. KGaA,2006
2. Sergio Franco, “Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated
Circuits”, 3rd Edition, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. Ronald.K.Jurgan “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, 2nd Edition , McGraw-
Hill, Inc.,1995
4. William.B.Ribbens , “Understanding Automotive Electronics” 7th edition
Butterworth-Heinemann publications,2012.
5. D.Roy Choudhry, Shail Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age
International Pvt. Ltd., 2000.
6. Robert F.Coughlin, Frederick F.Driscoll, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear
Integrated Circuits”, Sixth Edition, PHI, 2001.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
L T P C
15AE311 I.C Engines and its Subsystems
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15ME201
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

The purpose of this course is to impart the knowledge on IC Engine and

PURPOSE
their subsystems
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Acquire knowledge about combustion in SI engine a c d e
2. Gain knowledge on combustion in CI engine a c e

99 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
3. Conceive technological knowledge on gasoline and
a c d e h
diesel injection systems
4. Obtain knowledge about engine emission control
a c d e
Techniques
5. Gain familiarity on cooling, lubrication and
a c d e h k
turbocharging

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit I: Combustion in SI Engines 9
1. Construction and working of SI engines 1 C 2 1
Combustion process in SI engines, C
2. 2 2 1
Stages of combustion
Flame propagation - Flame velocity and C
3. area of flame front - Rate of pressure 2 2 1
rise - Cycle to cycle variation
Abnormal combustion - Theories of C
4. detonation - Effect of engine operating 2 2 1
variables on combustion
Combustion chambers - types, factors C,D
5. 2 2 1
controlling combustion chamber design.
Unit II : Combustion in CI Engines 9
Construction and working of CI engines C
6. 2 1 1
Stages of combustion -
Delay period - Factors affecting delay C
7. period, Knock in CI engines Methods of 2 1 1
controlling diesel knock
Importance of air motion - Swirl, squish C
8. and turbulence - Swirl ratio. Fuel air 2 1 1
mixing
CI engine combustion chambers - C
9. Combustion chamber design objectives 2 1 1
- open and divided
Induction swirl, turbulent Combustion C
10. chambers. - Air cell chamber - M 1 1 1
Combustion chamber.
Unit III: Gasoline and Diesel Injection 9
Petrol injection -mono point, multi-point C
11. and direct injection systems - Principles 2 1 1
and Features

100 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Function of components - Jerk and C
12. 2 1 1
distributor type pumps, Injection lag
CRDI injection system-Unit injector - C
13. 2 1 1
Mechanical and pneumatic governors
Fuel injector - Types of injection nozzle C
14. 2 1 1
- Injection timing
Factors influencing fuel spray C
15. atomization, penetration and dispersion 1 1 1
of diesel
Unit IV : IC Engines Emission
9
Control
SI ENGINE- Emission Control C
16. 1 3 1
techniques -Thermal reactor
Exhaust gas recirculation, three way C
17. 1 3 1
catalytic convertor
Charcoal canister control for C
18. evaporative emission- positive crank 2 3 1
case ventilation for blow by gas
CI ENGINE-Emission control C
19. techniques, exhaust gas recirculation, 2 3 1
NOx selective catalytic reduction
Diesel oxidation catalytic convertor, C
20. diesel particulate filter, NOx versus 2 3 1
particulates –trade off
21. Emission standards and driving cycles 1 C 3 1
Unit V: Cooling, Lubrication and
9
Turbocharging
Need for cooling system -Types of C
22. cooling system - Forced circulation 2 4 1
system, pressure cooling system
properties of coolant, additives for C
23. 1 4 1
coolants Need for lubrication system
Wet sump any dry sump lubrication - C
24. Properties of lubricants, consumption of 2 4 1
oil.
Thermodynamics of supercharging and C
25. Turbo charging – Turbo lag-Windage 2 4 1
losses - Turbo charging methods

101 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Classification of scavenging systems - C
26. Mixture control through Reed valve 2 5 1
induction.
Total contact hours 45
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Ganesan V, “Internal combustion engines”, 4th edition, Tata McGraw Hill
Education, 2012.
2. Mathur and Sharma, “A course on Internal combustion Engines”, Dhanpat Rai
& Sons, 1985.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. John. B, Heywod, “Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals”, McGraw Hil
Publishing Co., New York, 1990.
4. Ramalingam K. K, “Internal Combustion Engine”, Scitech Publication (India)
Pvt.Ltd. 2000.
5. Duffy Smith, “Auto Fuel Systems”, The Good Heart Willcox Company Inc.,
Publishers, 1987.
6. Edward F, Obert, “Internal Combustion Engines and Air Pollution”, Intext
Education Publishers, 1980.
7. Rajput R. K, “A textbook of Internal Combustion Engines”, 2nd edition, Laxmi
Publications (P) Ltd, 2007.
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15AE312 Vehicular Structures And Driveline Systems
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15ME203,15ME204
Data Book /
NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017
102 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 This course provides the basic knowledge, principle of operation and
PURPOSE performance of various components and drives in an Automotive
Chassis and Transmission system.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able
to
1. Understand the basics of Vehicle frames,
a c e k
Front and Rear axles
2. Acquire the fundamentals of automotive
a d e k
driveline systems
3. Explore the various components
a b c e
associated with suspension systems
4. Familiarize the automotive transmission
a b d e k
systems
5. Impart the knowledge of braking system,
a c e k
Wheels and tyres

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Frames, Front and Rear Axles 13
1. Different types of chassis layout- FF, FR, 1 C 1 1
RR and 4WD. Types of vehicle body and
classification.
2. Frames- construction, Materials, Loads 2 C 1 1
acting on frames. Types of vehicle frames-
Ladder frame, Tubular frame, integral
frame, X-frame, Roll-cage frames.
3. Common vehicle platform- Need, merits 1 C 1 1
and demerits. Case study-Volkswagen PQ
platform, Nissan B platform.
4. Front axle – Live axles, Dead axles, Drop 1 C 1 1
axles, Push and tag axles. Rear axles –
Semi, full and three quarter floating.
Housing types- Split Banjo and Salisbury
type.
5. Front wheel geometry - Caster, Camber, 2 C 1 1
Toe in and toe out, SAI. Steering systems -
True rolling motion of wheels and
Numerical Analysis.
6. Ackermann and Davis steering 2 C,D 1 1
mechanism - Simple problems
103 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
7. Constructional details of steering linkages 1 C 1 1
for rigid axle and independent front axles.
8. Steering gear box - Re-circulating ball type, 1 C 1 1
Rack and pinion type, Worm and Nut type.
9. Power assisted steering - Hydraulic and 1 C 1 1
EPS.
10. Four wheel Steering. 1 C 1 1
Unit - II Drive Line and Final Drives 9
11. Effect of driving thrust and torque 1 C 2 1
reactions.
12. Hotchkiss drive and front wheel drive. 1 C 2 1
13. Propeller shaft –Construction, Critical 1 C 2 1
speed, Universal joint, Slip joint.
14. Constant velocity joints - Rzeppa and 1 C 2 1
Tripod joints.
15. Different types of final drive - Worm and 1 C 2 1
worm wheel, Straight bevel gear, Spiral
bevel gear and hypoid gear final drives.

16. Double reduction final drive. 1 C 2 1

17. Twin speed final drive. 1 C 2 1
18. Differential - Principle, Construction details. 1 C 2 1
19. Differential lock and limited slip differential. 1 C 2 1
Unit - III SUSPENSION SYSTEM 8 C
20. Need for suspension system. 1 C 3 1
21. Types of suspension - Independent and 1 C 3 1
Non independent.
22. Independent suspension - McPherson and 1 C 3 1
Wishbone suspension.
23. Types of suspension springs - Leaf spring, 1 C 3 1
Coil spring, Torsion bar, Rubber springs.
24. Shock absorbers. 1 C 3 1
25. Pneumatic suspension systems. 1 C 3 1
26. Rear axle suspension system - 1 C 3 1
Independent, Trailing Arm, De-dion
suspension and torsion beam.
27. Anti-roll bar, Pan hard rod and Radius rod. 1 C 3 1
28. Unit - IV Transmission System 13

104 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
29. Types of clutches and construction and 2 C 4 2
working of single plate, multi plate and
centrifugal clutch.
30. Torque capacity of clutch – Numerical 1 D 4 2
Analysis.
31. Fluid coupling - Construction and principle 1 C 4 3
of operation.
32. Torque converters - Construction and 1 C 4 3
principle of operation.
33. Hydro kinetic drives - Multistage and poly- 1 C 4 3
phase torque converters.
34. Types of gear boxes - Working of sliding 1 C 4 2
and constant mesh gear boxes.
35. Construction and working of synchromesh 1 C 4 2
gear box and principle of synchronizers
36. Planetary gear box - construction and 1 C 4 2
working.
37. Numerical in Gear box. 1 C,D 4 2
38. Automatic transmission - Chevrolet turbo 2 C 4 2
glide and Power glide - Construction and
working.
39. Hydraulic clutch actuation for Automatic 1 C 4 2
transmission.
Unit - V Brakes, Wheels and Tyres 13
40. Theory of braking. 1 C 5 1
41. Stopping distance - Braking efficiency – 2 C,D 5 1
Numerical analysis.
42. Drum brakes - Single cam , Double cam , 1 C 5 1
Leading and Trailing shoe types.
43. Disc brakes - Fixed, floating and , radial 2 C 5 1
mounted calipers. Ventilated discs, cross
drilled discs, slotted discs.
44. Mechanical and hydraulic brake actuation. 1 C 5 1
45. Vacuum and Air assisted hydraulic brakes. 1 C 5 1
46. Pneumatic braking system. 1 C 5 1
47. Need for ABS, ESP, EBD and 1 C 5 1
Regenerative braking systems
48. Types of Wheels - Dimensions and 1 C 5 1

105 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Constructional details
49. Types - Construction - Cross ply, Radial 1 C 5 1
ply, tube and tubeless tyres.
50. Tyre designation and tread patterns. 1 C 5 1
51. Cycle test I 1
52. Cycle test II 2
53. Surprise test 1
Total contact hours 60

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Kirpal Singh, "Automobile Engineering - Vol I", Standard Publishers
Distributors, 1999.
2. Crouse W.H, Anglin D.L, "Automotive Transmission and Power Train
construction", McGraw Hill, 1976.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. Heldt P.M, "Torque converters", Chilton Book Co., 1992.
4. Newton Steeds & Garrot, "Motor Vehicles", SAE International and Butterworth
Heinemann, 2001.
5. CDX Automotive, "Fundamentals of Automotive Technology, Principles and
practive", Jones & Barlett Publishers, 2013.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
L T PC
15AE305L Automotive Components Laboratory
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: 15AE302
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core Vehicle Technology
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016
106 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 This Laboratory course is intended to give the students, experimental
PURPOSE
knowledge about various automotive components.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand different types of frames used in various b
Automobiles
2. Dismantle and assemble the various systems in b
automobile
3. Understand the Seating Layout b
Sl. Contact C-D-
Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
1. Study of Frames used for HMV, Car, Two and
3 C,I 1,2 1
Three Wheelers
2. Dismantling and assembling of different types
3 I,O 1,2 1
of engines
3. Dismantling and assembling of Fuel supply
3 I,O 1,2 1
system
4. Dismantling and assembling of Steering
3 I,O 1,2 1
system
5. Dismantling and assembling of Suspension
3 I,O 1,2 1
system
6. Dismantling and assembling of Braking system 3 I,O 1,2 1
7. Dismantling and assembling of Wheels and
3 I,O 1,2 1
Tyres
8. Dismantling and assembling of Propeller Shaft,
3 I,O 1,2 1
Universal Joints and Differential
9. Study of Driver Seat 3 C,I 1,2 1
10. Brake adjustment and bleeding 3 I,O 1,2 1
Total contact hours 30
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. REFERENCES
No.
1. Laboratory Manual
Course nature Practical
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In- Assessment Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model Total
semester tool Voce examination
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%
107 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Automotive Transducers And Signal L T P C
15AE310L
Conditioners Laboratory 0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Automobile
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

PURPOSE To provide the knowledge about Automotive Transducers and Signal

Conditioners.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT
OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Design and implements digital circuits using logic gates a b e
and Flipflops
2. Interface and study the automotive sensor a b e
characteristics
3. Understand the principles of automotive sensors and a b d e
acquire realtime data
4. Interface and control an actuator for automotive a b d e
application
5. Design analog circuits using operational amplifiers a b d e

Sl. Contact C-D-

Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
Study of basic Digital IC’s C,I
1. 2 1 1,2
AND,OR,EXOR,NOT,NOR,NAND ,O
C,I
2. Study of Flip-flops JK , RS , D 2 1 1,2
,O
Combination Logic Adder, Subtractor,
C,I
3. Code Converter, 2 1 1,2
,O
Encoeder,Decoder,MUX,DEMUX
Introduction to Transducers and Signal C,I
4. 2 2 1,4
Conditioners. ,O
TPS, MAF Sensor Interfacing and
5. 2 I,O 2 1,4
Characteristic Study
RPM, CT ,Lambda Sensor Interfacing and
6. 2 I,O 2, 1,4
Characteristic Study

108 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Sl. Contact C-D-
Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
7. Interfacing and control of Relay actuator 2 I,O 2 1,4
Op-Amp Linear Application :Adder,
8. Subtractor, Comparator, Differentiator, 2 I,O 4 1,4
Integrator
Op-Amp Nonlinear Application : Cliper,
9. 2 I,O 5 3
Clamper, Peak Detector
10. Filters Realization 2 I,O 5 3
Total contact hours 20

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. “Automotive Transducers and signal conditioners” –Lab Manual
2. M. Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,
2008 / Pearson Education (Singapore) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. D.Roy Choudhry, Shail Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age
International Pvt. Ltd., 2000.
4. William.B.Ribbens , “Understanding Automotive Electronics” 7th edition
Butterworth-Heinemann publications,2012

Course nature Theory + Practical

Assessment Method – Theory Component (Weightage 50%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Cycle test I Quiz Total
tool test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

Assessment Method – Practical Component (Weightage 50%)

Assessment MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model
In- Experiments Record Total
tool Voce examination
semester
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%

109 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 L T P C
15AE314L Engine and Vehicle Testing Laboratory
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: 15AE311
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core Design Engineering
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

To understand the various dynamic behavior of road vehicles under

PURPOSE
various loading conditions and its computer simulation using computer
aided tools.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Perform testing using dynamometers. b e k
2. Perform engine analysis using diagnostic systems. b e k
3. Conduct wheel balancing and alignment. b e k
4. Obtain the knowledge of test engines a b
5. Test the lubricants and fuels used for IC engines a b

Sl. Contact C-D-

Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
1. Valve Timing Diagram for Four Stroke Engine
3 D,I,O 1 2
Port Timing Diagram for Two Stroke Engine
2. Performance test on constant speed diesel
3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3
engine
3. Test for optimum coolant flow rate in IC engines 3 D,I,O 1-3 1-3
4. Energy Balance test on an Automotive Diesel
3 D,I,O 1-3 1-3
Engine
5. Determination of viscosity of oil by different
methods like, Redwood, Say bolt and Engler’s 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3
Viscometer
6. Studying the performance of a two wheeler
3 I,O 3 1,3
using Eddy current chassis dynamometer.
7. Testing of four wheeler using chassis
3 I,O 3 1,3
dynamometer
8. Determination of slide slip, suspension
efficiency, brake efficiency and headlight 3 I,O 3 1,3
alignment using car test lane.
110 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Sl. Contact C-D-
Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
9. Wheel alignment, wheel balancing, tire removal
3 I,O 3 1,3
and fitment
10. Emission measurement in Petrol and Diesel
vehicle (HC,CO,CO2, O2, NOx and smoke 3 I,O 3 1,3
intensity)
Total contact hours 30

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. REFERENCES
No.
1. Laboratory Manual
2. Giles J.G, “Vehicle Operation and performance”, Iliffe Books Ltd., London,1989
3. Crouse W.H, Anglin D.L, “Motor Vehicle Inspection”, McGraw Hill Book Co.,1978.
4. Ganesan V, “Internal Combustion Engines”, 2nd edition, Tata McGraw HillCo.,
2012.

Course nature Practical

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In- Assessment Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model Total
semester tool Voce examination
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%

L T P C
15AE390L Industrial Training-I
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

111 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 To provide short-term work experience in an Industry/ Company/
PURPOSE
Organisation
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To get an inside view of an industry and
j
organization/company
2. To gain valuable skills and knowledge j
3. To make professional connections and enhance
f g
networking
4. To get experience in a field to allow the student to
i
make a career transition

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
1. It is mandatory for every student to D, 1,2,3
undergo this course. I,O ,4
2. Every student is expected to spend a
minimum of 15-days in an Industry/
Company/ Organization, during the
summer vacation.
3. The type of industry must be NOT
below the Medium Scale category in
his / her domain of the degree
programme.
4. The student must submit the “Training
Completion Certificate” issued by the
industry / company / Organisation as
well as a technical report not
exceeding 15 pages, within the
stipulated time to be eligible for
making a presentation before the
committee constituted by the
department.
5. The committee will then assess the
student based on the report submitted
and the presentation made.
6. Marks will be awarded out of
maximum 100.
7. Appropriate grades will be assigned
as per the regulations.
112 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O

8. Only if a student gets a minimum of

pass grade, appropriate credit will be
transferred towards the degree
requirements, as per the regulations.
9. It is solely the responsibility of the
individual student to fulfill the above
conditions to earn the credits.
10. The attendance for this course, for
the purpose of awarding attendance
grade, will be considered 100%, if the
credits are transferred, after satisfying
the above (1) to (8) norms; else if the
credits are not transferred or
transferable, the attendance will be
considered as ZERO.
11. The committee must recommend
redoing the course, if it collectively
concludes, based on the assessment
made from the report and
presentations submitted by the
student, that either the level of
training received or the skill and / or
knowledge gained is NOT
satisfactory.
Total contact hours

Course nature Training – 100% internal continuous assessment

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment
In- Presentation Report Total
tool
semester
Weightage 80% 20% 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%

113 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 SEMESTER - VI

L T P C
15PD302 Aptitude IV
1 0 1 1
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: APTITUDE I
Data Book /
NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category G GENERAL
Course designed by Career Development Centre
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016
To give the right knowledge, skill and aptitude to face any competitive
PURPOSE
examination.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. build a strong base in the fundamental mathematical a
concepts
2. grasp the approaches and strategies to solve
e
problems with speed and accuracy
3. gain appropriate skills to succeed in preliminary i
selection process for recruitment
4. collectively solve problems in teams & group. d

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Pure Arithmetic-II 4
1. Arithmetic Progression 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
2. Geometric Progression 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
3. Sets 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
4. Functions 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
Unit - II Commercial Arithmetic-1I 8
5. Clocks 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
6. Calendar 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
7. Ratio Proportion 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
8. Ratio Proportion 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
9. Mixtures & Solutions 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
10. Mixtures & Solutions 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
11. Average 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
12. Surprise Test-I

114 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - III Commercial Arithmetic-1II
Unit III: Algebra I
13. Time, Speed, Distance 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
14. Time, Speed, Distance-Races 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
15. Problems on Trains 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
16. Boats & Streams 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
17. Time and work 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
18. Pipes and Cisterns 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
Unit - IVGeometry 6
19. Geometry I 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
20. Geometry II 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
21. Mensuration I 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
22. Mensuration II 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
23. Trigonometry I 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
24. Trigonometry II 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-4,8-11
Unit - V Modern Mathematics 6
25. Data sufficiency I 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-11
26. Data sufficiency II 1 C-I-O 1-4 1-11
27. Data Interpretation I 1 C-I-O 1-4 6-11
28. Data Interpretation II 1 C-I-O 1-4 6-11
29. Data Interpretation III 1 C-I-O 1-4 6-11
30. Surprise Test II 1
Total contact hours 30

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. No. TEXT BOOK
1. Dinesh Khattar-The Pearson Guide to QUANTITATIVE APTITUDE for
competitive examinations.
REFERENCE BOOKS
2. Dr. Agarwal.R.S – Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations,
S.Chand &Company Limited 2011
3. Abhijit Guha, Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, Tata
McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2011
4. Arun Sharma-Quantitative aptitude for CAT, Tata McGraw Hill
5. Edgar Thrope, Test Of Reasoning for Competitive Examinations, Tata
McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2012
6. The Pearson Guide to Data Interpretation and Logical Reasoning for the CAT
(With CD) by Nishit K. Sinha Publisher: Pearson
115 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 7. How to Prepare for Data Interpretation for the CAT Common Admission Test
by Arun Sharma Publisher: Tata McGraw-Hill
ON-LINE RESOURCES
8. www.indiabix.com
9. www.lofoya.com
10. www.careerbless.com
11. www.achieversforce.com

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15AE301 Design Of Automotive Components
2 2 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15ME203
Data Book / Approved Design Data book
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core Design Engineering
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To acquire knowledge about the designing of automotive engine

PURPOSE
components
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Design of shaft a e
2. Design of cylinder and piston a e
3. Design of connecting rod a e
4. Familiarize with design procedure of crank shaft a e
5. Design of cylinder head and valve actuating
a e
mechanism

116 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D- Referen
Session Description of Topic IOs
hours I-O ce
Unit - I Design Of Shaft 9
1. Materials used for shaft, manufacturing of
1 C 1 1,2
shaft and types of shaft
2. Standard size of transmission shafts,
1 C,D 1 1,2
stresses in shafts
3. Maximum permissible working stresses for
1 C,D 1 1,2
transmission for transmission shafts
4. Design of shaft- shaft subjected to twisting
moment only, shaft subjected to bending
3 C,D 1 1,2
moment, shaft subjected to combined
twisting moment and bending moment
5. Design of shaft subjected to fluctuating load,
axial load in addition to combined torsion 2 C,D 1 1,2
and bending loads
6. Design of shaft on the basis of rigidity 1 C,D 1 1,2
Unit - II Design of Cylinder And Piston 8
7. Introduction to I.C engines and components 1 C 2 1,2
8. Materials selection based on engine
components and its function-Design of 3 C,D 2 1,2
cylinder block and cylinder.
9. Description on function of piston in an I.C
2 C,D 2 1,2
engines-Design of piston
10. Description on piston rings-compression
2 C,D 2 1,2
ring-oil rings, piston failure
Unit - III Design of Connecting Rod 8
11. Introduction - material selection for
1 C 3 1,2
connecting rod
12. Design of connecting rod small end 2 C,D 3 1,2
13. Design of connecting rod big end and shank
2 C,D 3 1,2
design
14. Design of connecting rod-cap bolt design 3 C,D 3 1,2
Unit - IV Design of Crankshaft 8
15. Introduction about crank shaft and its
1 C 4 1,2
function in an I.C Engine.
16. Materials selection for crankshaft 1 C 4 1,2
17. Balancing of I.C. engines, MI of Crankshaft,
2 C,D 4 1,2
significance of firing order.

117 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 18. Design of crankshaft under bending and
2 C,D 4 1,2
twisting, balancing weight calculations.
19. Development of short and long crank arms.
Front and rear end Details. Matrix from 2 C,D 4 1,2
element stiffness
Unit - V Design of Cylinder Head and
8
Valve Actuating Mechanisms
20. Introduction about cylinder block and head in
1 C,D 5 1,2
an I.C Engine
21. Design of cylinder block head, bolt loads
2 C,D 5 1,2
and gasket
22. Design of valve spring and valves 3 C,D 5 1,2
23. Design of push rod 2 C,D 5 1,2
24. Cycle test-I 1
25. Cycle test-II 2
26. Surprise test 1
Total contact hours 45

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. No. TEXT BOOKS
1. Kulkarni S. G, “Machine Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008.
2. Bhandari V, “Design of Machine Elements”,Tata McGraw-Hill Education,
2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. William Orthein, “Machine Component Design”, Jaico Publishing House,
1998 - 99.
4. Shigley J, “Mechanical Engineering Design”, Mc Graw Hill, 2001.
5. Joseph Edward Shigley and Charles R.Mischke, “Mechanical Engineering
Design”,McGraw-Hill International Edition, 1989.
6. Gitin M.Maitra and LN Prasad, “Hand Book of Mechanical Design”, Tata
McGraw Hill, 1985.
7. Spots M. F, “Design of Machine Elements”, Prentice Hall of India Private
Ltd., New Delhi, 1983.
8. William Orthwein, “Machine Component Design”, Vol. I and II, Jaico
Publising house, Chennai, 1996
9. Design Data, PSG College of Technology, 2008.

118 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In- Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise Quiz Total
semester tool test I test II III Test
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15ME304 Fluid Power Control
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: Nil
Prerequisite: Nil
Data Book /
Nil
Codes/Standards
MANUFACTURING
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE ENGINEERING
Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To understand the fluid power systems and to develop circuits for

PURPOSE
industrial applications.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the principles and characteristics of e
hydraulic components.
2. Familiarize the principles and characteristics of
e
pneumatic components.
3. Design the circuit for given applications. c e
4. Analyze the maintenance and trouble shooting of e
fluid power systems.

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Hydraulic Power
10
Generating and Utilizing Systems
Introduction to fluid power system, C
1. Hydraulic fluids functions, types, 1 1 1,2
properties, selection and application.

119 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Power Generating Elements: C
Construction, operation,
2. 1 1 1,2
characteristics of External Gear
pump, internal Gear pump
Construction, operation, C
3. characteristics of Lobe, Gerotor and 1 1 1,2
Screw pumps
Construction, operation, C
4. characteristics of Un balanced and 1 1 1,2
balanced vane pump
Construction, operation, C
5. characteristics of pressure 1 1 1,2
compensated vane pump
Construction, operation, C
characteristics of bent axis piston
6. 1 1 1,2
pump, swash plate piston pump and
Radial Piston Pump
Construction and working of single C
7. acting, double acting hydraulic linear 1 1 1,2
actuators
Special cylinders: Tandem, Rodless, C
8. 1 1 1,2
Telescopic
Cushioning arrangement for C
9. cylinders to reduce the impact on the 1 1 1,2
cylinders, Various cylinder mountings
Construction and working of Gear, C
10. Vane, Piston motors to obtain rotary 1 1 1,2
motion
Unit - II Hydraulic Valves and
9
Accessories
construction and working of manually C
11. operated 2/2, 3/2, 4/2, 4/3, directional 1 1 1,2
control valves
construction and working of pilot and C
12. solenoid operated 2/2, 3/2, 4/2, 4/3, 1 1 1,2
directional control valves
Construction and working of pressure C
13. relief, compound pressure relief, 1 1 1,2
pressure sequence valves
120 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Construction and working of pressure C 1
14. 1 1,2
reducing, counter balance valves
Working principle of check valve, C
throttle valve, one way FCV,
15. 1 1 1,2
pressure compensated FCV, and
their applications
Importance of proportional valves, C
16. 1 1 1,2
Servo valves and its applications
Need for intensifier in hydraulic C
17. 1 1 1,2
systems, applications
Different switches, filters, seals, C
18. fittings and other accessories used in 1 1 1,2
hydraulic systems
Functions, types and applications of C
19. 1 1 1,2
accumulators in hydraulics
Unit - III Pneumatic Systems 9
Introduction, comparison with C
20. hydraulic systems and electrical 1 2 1,3
systems
Construction, operation, C
21. characteristics and symbols of 1 2 1,3
reciprocating and rotary compressors
Construction, operation, C
characteristics and symbols of 3/2,
22. 5/2, 5/3 manual operated, pilot 1 2 1,3
operated and solenoid operated
DCVs
Need for air treatment, Filter, C
23. Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler and 1 2 1,3
Dryers
Introduction to fluidic devices, C,D
24. working of Bi-stable, mono-stable 2 2,3 1,3
devices and application circuits
Introduction to Electro Pneumatics, C,D
logic circuits, constructing electrical
25. 2 2,3 1,3
ladder diagrams for various fluid
power applications
Pneumatic Sensors types and C
26. 1 2 1,3
applications
121 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - IV Design of Fluid Power
10
Systems
Speed, force and time calculations in C,D
27. 1 3 1,2,3
fluid power systems
Calculation of pressure and pressure C,D
28. drop across components in fluid 1 3 1,2,3
power circuits
Sizing of actuators, pumps, C, D
29. 1 3 1,2,3
reservoirs for specific requirement
Finding the capacity (Sizing) of C, D
accumulators required for hydraulic
30. 1 3 1,2,3
systems, Calculations on Heat
generation in fluid
Design of hydraulic/pneumatic circuit C, D
for a practical application Selection of
31. different components such as 1 3 1,2,3
reservoir, various valves, actuators,
filters, pumps based on design
Design of hydraulic/pneumatic C, D
circuits for simple reciprocation,
32. 1 3 1,2,3
regenerative, speed control of
actuators
Design of hydraulic/pneumatic C, D
33. circuits for sequencing, 1 3 1,2,3
synchronization and transverse
Cascading circuits for two and three C,D
34. 2 3 1,2,3
cylinders
Fail-safe circuit, counter balance C, D
35. 1 3 1,2,3
circuit, actuator locking
Unit -V Applications, Maintenance
7
and Trouble Shooting
Industrial hydraulic circuits for C, D
36. 1 3 1,2,3
riveting machine, actuator locking
Working of hydraulic press and pump C, D
37. 1 3 1,2,3
unloading circuits
Hydraulic / pneumatic circuits for C, D
38. 1 3 1,2,3
material handling systems
Preventive and breakdown, C
39. 1 4 1,2,3
maintenance procedures in fluid
122 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
power systems
Trouble shooting of fluid power C
systems, fault finding process
40. 2 4 1,2,3
equipments / tools used, causes and
remedies.
Safety aspects involved fluid power C
41. 1 4 1,2,3
systems.
Total contact hours 45

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with applications”, Prentice Hall International,
2009
2. Majumdar.S.R, “Oil Hydraulic Systems: Principles and Maintenance”, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2006.
3. Majumdar.S.R, “Pneumatic systems – principles and maintenance”, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2006
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
4. Werner Deppert / Kurt Stoll, “Pneumatic Application:Mechanization and
Automation by Pneumatic Contro”l, Vogel verlag, 1986.
5. John Pippenger, Tyler Hicks, “Industrial Hydraulics”, McGraw Hill International
Edition, 1980.
6. Andrew Parr, “Hydraulics and Pneumatics: A technician's and engineer's
guide”, Elsevier Ltd, 2011.
7. FESTO, “Fundamentals of Pneumatics”, Vol I, II and III.
8. Hehn Anton, H., “Fluid Power Trouble Shooting”, Marcel Dekker Inc., NewYork,
1995.
9. Thomson, “Introduction to Fluid power”, Prentice Hall, 2004.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

123 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Automotive Electrical and L T P C
15AE307J
Electronics System 3 0 2 4
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15AE202/15AE208
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE
Course designed by Department of Automobile
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To provide the knowledge about the application of electrical and

PURPOSE
electronics in automotive systems
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understanding battery, Cranking motor a b e
construction and testing methods.
2. Understand the principle of alternator and to test a b e
the alternator
3. Understand the Electronic Controls in Gasoline a b d e
Engine
4. Understand the basics of Vehicle Motion Control a b d e
and telematics system
5. Perform OBD II test on vehicle and Program a b c d e
MYRIO hardware using Labview

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic (Theory) IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit -I Batteries and Starting
9
Systems
Vehicle Batteries –Lead acid battery
1. Construction, Working Principle, 1 C 1 1
Battery Rating
Lead Acid battery Charging methods
2. and Testing Methods and Fault 2 C,D 1 1
Diagnosis.
Requirement of a starting System,
3. Starter motor Construction and 2 C,D 1 1
Working.
Starter Drive Mechanism –Bendix
4. 1 C 1 1
drive and Folo-thru drive

124 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic (Theory) IOs Reference
hours I-O
Starter Drive Mechanism – Over
Running Clutch and Solenoid
5. 1 C 1 1
Mechanism. Starter Motor Fault
Diagnosis
New Developments in Battery
6. 2 1 1
Technologies and Starting System C
Unit - II Charging System and
9
Lighting Auxiliaries
Alternator Principle, Construction ,
7. Working and its merits over D.C 2 C,D 2 1
Generator.
Alternator Charging Circuits and
8. Rectification of AC to DC,Alternator 1 C,D 2 1
Testing Methods
Mechanical and Electronic Voltage
9. 1 C,D 2 1
regulator –Principle and Working
Lighting Fundamentals and Lighting
10. 2 C 2 1
Circuit
Conventional Headlamps and LED
11. 2 C 2 1
Lighting System
Wipersystem and Signalling and
12. 1 C 2 1
Warning system
Unit - III Electronic Engine
9
Management System
Electronics and feedback in injection
13. 2 C,D 3 2,4
system
Conventional ignition vs electronic
14. ignition methods and knock control 2 C 3 1,2
system
15. Digital Engine Control Modes 1 C 3 2
EGR Control and variable valve
16. 2 C 3 2
timing
Ignition Controlling –Closed loop
17. ignition timing,Spark Advance 2 C 3 2
Correction Scheme
Unit - IV Fundamentals of Vehicle
9
Motion Control

125 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic (Theory) IOs Reference
hours I-O
Cruise Control System and Adaptive
Cruise Control System Working –
18. 2 C,D 4 2
Throttle Actuator Stepper Motor
Based Control
Antilock Braking Mechanism –Tire
19. 2 C,D 4 2
Slip Controller
Electronic Suspension System –
20. Variable Damping,Variable Spring 3 C,D 4 2
rate
Electric Power Assisted Steering
21. Mechanism, Four Wheel Steering 2 C,D 4 2
and Steer-by-Wire
Unit - V Telematics and Vehicle
9
Diagonstics
GPS Navigation ,GPS Structure and
22. Dead Reckoning using Inertial 2 C 4 2
Navigation System
Invehicle infotainment systems
23. 2 C 5 2
,ADAS features
Electronic Control System
24. Diagonistics, OBDII, Diagonistics 2 C 5 2
Fault Codes
Introduction to Model-based Sensor
25. Failure Detection –Case Study on 3 C,D 5 2
MAF Sensor calibration
Total contact hours 45

Sl. Contact C-D-

Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
Battery Testing –Hydrometer, Load test,
C,I,
1. Individual Cell voltage test, Jump Start 5 1 1
O
Principle.
Starter Motor and Alternator Testing –
C,I,
2. Continuity test, Insulation Test, Load 5 2 1
O
test,Voltage testing
Fault Diagnosis using OBD handheld
3. 5 I,O 5 2,4
Devices
C,I,
4. Basics of Labview Programming 3 5 3
O
126 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Sl. Contact C-D-
Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
Implementing Analog to Digital
5. 3 I,O 5 3
conversion with IR Sensor
PWM Signal generation and H-Bridge
6. 3 I,O 5 3
Motor Control Application
Implementing Serial Communication for a
7. 3 I,O 5 3
parking sensor application
Interfacing Accelerometer and
8. 3 I,O 5 3
Gyroscope for IMU based application
Total contact hours 30

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Tom Denton “Automobile Electrical and Electronic Systems” 3rd
edition,Elsiever Butterworth-Heinemann 2004.
2. William.B.Ribbens , “Understanding Automotive Electronics” 7th edition
Butterworth-Heinemann publications,2012.
3. Ed Doering “NI MYRIO Project Essential Guide” 2013,National Technology
and Science Press
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
4. Allan.W.M.Bonnick “Automotive Computer Controlled System
2001,Butterworth-Heinemann
5 Robert Bosch Gmbh “Bosch Automotive Electric and Electronics” 5 th edition
Springer-Vieweg
Course nature Theory + Practical
Assessment Method – Theory Component (Weightage 50%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Cycle test I Quiz Total
tool test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

Assessment Method – Practical Component (Weightage 50%)

Assessment MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model
In- Experiments Record Total
tool Voce examination
semester
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%

127 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 L T P C
15AE313 Automotive Microcontrollers
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15AE208
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

To understand the importance of microcontrollers and to learn

PURPOSE
Microcontroller Programming for Automotive applications.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
Acquire the knowledge of 8051 Microcontroller’s a b d
1.
architecture
2. Program 8051 using Assembly level programming a b d e k
Use the high level programming language for a b d k
3.
embedded application development
Get familiarized with the internals of AVR and a b d k
4.
program it using C language.
Learn about the special on-chip peripherals a b d k
5.
available on automotive grade microcontrollers

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
UNIT -I 8051 ARCHITECTURE 7
Introduction to Microprocessors
1. and Microcontrollers and 1 C 1 1
differences
8051 Architecture-Clock, PC, DP,
CPU registers, PSW, RAM, ROM,
SP, SFR, IO ports, Connecting
2. 4 C,D 1 1
External Memory, Counters,
Timers, Serial Data Input / output,
Interrupts
Addressing Modes of 8051
3. 2 C,D 1 1
microcontroller
a. UNIT –II PROGRAMMING 8051 11

128 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Logical Operations-Bit level, Byte
4. 1 C,D 1,2 1,3
Level, Rotate and swap Operation
Arithmetic Operations-
5. Incrementing, Decrementing, 2 C,D 1,2 1,3
Addition, Subtraction
Jumps, Calls and subroutines,
6. 1 C,D 1,2 1,3
Interrupts and Return
Expanding I/O, Memory Mapped
7. 1 C 1,2 1,3
I/O
Timing Subroutine-Software Delay,
8. 1 2 1,3
Hardware Delay C,D
Lookup table for 8051,PC as Base
9. 1 C,D 2 1,3
address, DPTR as Base address
Serial Data Transmission-Polling
10. and interrupt driven for 2 C,D 2 1,3
transmission and reception
Application Programming-Scanning
11. Keyboard inputs and Analog digital 2 C,D,I 2 1,3
conversions
UNIT- III INTRODUCTION TO
9
EMBEDDED C
Program Languages for Embedded
system application-Advantages of
12. 1 C 3 2
Higher level programming
language
Basics of C program language –
Data
13. 3 C,D 3 2
Types,variables,Keywords,Pointers
,Declarations,Constants,Operators
Datatype conversions, Switch, If,
14. For, While ,arrays, Functions, 4 C,D 3 2
Structure,
Embedded Programming Tool
15. 1 C,D 3 2
Chain –IDE with Simulator
UNIT - IV ADVANCED VIRTUAL
RISC (AVR) 9
MICROCONTROLLERS
ATMEGA328 –Basic Features,
16. 2 C,D 4 2
Core SFR’S and Ports
129 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
ATMEGA 328-Timer
17. 1 C,D 4 2
TMR0,TMR1,TMR2
ATMEGA 328-Capture Compare
18. 2 C,D 4 2
Module-CCM in PWM Mode
ATMEGA 328-Serial
19. 1 C,D 4 2
Communication Modules-I2C,SPI
Analog Modules –A/D convertor,
20. 1 C,D 4 2
Comparator
21. Clock Oscillator Configurations 1 C,D 4 2
22. EEPROM Configurations 1 C,D 4 2
UNIT - V AUTOMOTIVE GRADE
\ 9
PROCESSORS
Automotive grade processors ex:
23. 1 C 5 5
Renesas, Quorivva, Infineon
Understanding various
24. architectural attributes relevant to 2 C 5 5
automotive applications
Special On-chip Peripherals for
25. 3 C 5 5
Automotive Applications
Overview of Automotive
communication protocols : CAN,
26. 2 C 5 3
LIN , Flex Ray, MOST , Ethernet,
D2B and DSI
Introduction to Realtime operating
27. system –for task scheduling 1 C 5 3
activities
Total contact hours 45

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
Kenneth.J.Ayala “The 8051 Microcontroller,Architecture,Programming and
1.
Application” West Publishing Company,1991
Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Sarmad Naimi, Sepehr Naimi “AVR Microcontroller and
2. Embedded Systems Using Assembly and C “ Pearson Custom Electronics
Technology,2011
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi-8051 Microcontroller
3.
and Embedded Systems, The (1999)
130 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
4. Gilbert Held “Inter and Intra Vehicle Communications: Auerbach Publications,2008
DataSheets of Kinetis 32-bit MCU based on ARM,Infineon XCxx series and
5.
Multicore Aurix Architecture

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

Automotive Microcontrollers L T P C
15AE313L
Laboratory 0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

To enable the programming skill required for embedded system based

PURPOSE
application development.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Use Assembly level programming language to a b e
program 8051 Microcontroller
2. Explore various Open source tool chains for a b e
embedded system programming
3. Program AVR family Microcontrollers using a b d e
Embedded C libraries
4. Configure AVR Peripherals such as a b d e
ADC,EEPROM,TIMERS,SPI,I2C
5. Design and Develop an Embedded system for a b d e
automotive application using AVR Microcontroller

131 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of experiments IOs Reference
hours I-O
8051- Assembly level programming –
C,I,
1. Basic Arithmetic and logical 2 1 3
O
operations
8051-Finding 2’s complement of a C,I,
2. 2 2 3
number O
Introduction to Embedded C
Programming and IDE-Tool chains -
3. AVR-ATMEGA328 Operation on bits - 2 I,O 3 1
Blinking with Digital Outputs –Delay
functions
ATMEGA328 –EEPROM
4. 2 I,O 3 1,2
Programming
ATMEGA328- Configuring on-chip
5. 2 I,O 4 1,2
ADC –Interfacing sensors
ATMEGA328-Programming with
6. 2 I,O 4 1,2
Interrupts and Timers
ATMEGA328- Programming Serial
7. 2 I,O 4 1,2
Communication with Interrupts
ATMEGA328-Working with RTC and
8. 2 C,I,O 4 1,2
I2C
Implementing a moving average filter
9. 2 DI,O 5 1,2
for sensor noise correction
Building an Automotive Embedded
10. 2 D,I,O 5 1,2
application with ATMEGA328.
Total contact hours 20

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
Asang Dani,Yashavant Kanetkar- “Go Embedded” 1st Edition BPB
1.
Publications,2008
Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Sarmad Naimi, Sepehr Naimi “AVR Microcontroller and
2. Embedded Systems Using Assembly and C “ Pearson Custom Electronics
Technology,2011
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi “8051
3.
Microcontroller and Embedded Systems”, The (1999)
Kenneth.J.Ayala “The 8051 Microcontroller,Architecture,Programming and
4.
Application” West Publishing Company,1991

132 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Course nature Theory + Practical
Assessment Method – Theory Component (Weightage 50%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Cycle test I Quiz Total
tool test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

Assessment Method – Practical Component (Weightage 50%)

Assessment MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model
In- Experiments Record Total
tool Voce examination
semester
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%

L T P C
15AE376L Minor Project-II
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To obtain an hands-on experience in converting a small novel idea /

Purpose technique into a working model / prototype involving multi-disciplinary
skills and / or knowledge and working in at team.
Instructional objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able
To conceptualise a novel idea / technique into a
1. c
product
2. To think in terms of multi-disciplinary environment d
To understand the management techniques of
3. k
implementing a project
To take on the challenges of teamwork, prepare a
4. presentation in a professional manner, and document g
all aspects of design work.

133 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
An Multidisciplinary project to be taken up C,D,I 1,2,3,4
by a team of maximum of ten students.
Development of prototype product, a 3D
model, simulation, blueprint for a larger
project and any other development work
are permitted. The contribution of the
individuals in the project should be clearly
brought out. A combined report is to be
submitted. A presentation is to be made
for the reviewers on the work done by the
candidate.
Total contact hours

Course nature Project – 100% internal continuous assessment

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In- Assessment Refer the table Total
semester tool
Weightage Refer the table below 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%

Assessment Criteria or
Expected outcome Evaluators Marks
component basis
Project A short presentation to be delivered 0
proposal on:
(Review – I)  A brief, descriptive project title (2-4
words). This is critical!
 The 3 nearest competitors
(existing solutions) and price.
Viability /
 Team members name, phone
feasibility of
number, email, department/degree
Panel of the project
program, and year.
reviewers Extent of
 A description of the product preliminary
opportunity that has been work done.
identified. To include:
Documentation of the market
need, shortcomings of existing
competitive products, and
definition of the target market and
its size.
134 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
  Proposed supervisor / guide
Review II  Mission Statement / Techniques Originality, 20
 Concept Sketches, Design Multi-
Specifications / Modules & disciplinary
Techniques along with System component,
architecture Panel of clarity of
 Coding reviewers idea and
presentation,
team work,
handling
Q&A.
Review III  Final Concept and Model / Originality, 50
Algorithm/ Technique Multi-
 Drawings, Plans / programme disciplinary
output component,
 Financial Model / costing Panel of clarity of
 Prototype / Coding reviewers idea and
 Final Presentation and presentation,
Demonstration team work,
handling
Q&A.
Final A good technical report Regularity, 30
technical systematic
Report progress,
Supervisor
extent of
/ Guide
work and
quality of
work
Total 100

L T P C
15AE381L Seminar-II
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

135 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 To enhance the disseminating skills of the student about the current
PURPOSE
and contemporary research work that are being carried out across the
world
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able
To understand the research methodology adopted
1. h i j
by various researchers
To mathematically model a problem, critically
2. b c e
analyse it and adopt strategies to solve
To understand and present a well-documented
3. e g
research

Session Description of Topic Contact C-D- IOs Reference

hours I-O
Guidelines for conducting C,D 1,2,
15xx390L Seminar for B.Tech 3,4
1. Upon registering for
the course the student must
identify a sub-domain of the
degree specialization that is of
interest to the student and start
collecting research papers as
many as possible.
2. After collecting
sufficient number of research
papers the student must peruse
all the papers, meet the course
faculty and discuss on the
salient aspects of each and
every paper.
3. The course faculty,
after discussion with the student
will approve TWO research
papers that is appropriate for
presentation.
4. The student must
collect additional relevant
reference materials to
supplement and compliment the
two research papers and start
preparing the presentation.
136 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 5. Each student must
present a 15-minute
presentation on each of the
approved research paper to the
panel of evaluators.
6. The presenter must
present one research paper
within the first half of the
semester (6 weeks) and
another research paper in the
next half of the semester (6
weeks) as per the schedule.
7. All other students
registered for the course will
form the audience.
8. The audience as well
as the evaluators will probe the
student with appropriate
questions and solicit response
from the presenter.
9. The presentation will
be evaluated against 7 to 8
assessment criteria by 4 to 5
evaluators.
10. The score obtained
through the presentations of
TWO research papers will be
converted to appropriate
percentage of marks.
This course is 100% internal
continuous assessment.
Total contact hours 30

Course nature 100% internal continuous assessment.

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In- Assessment
Presentation 1 Presentation 2 Total
semester tool
Weightage 50% 50% 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%

137 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 L T P C
15AE386L Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs)-II
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To offer students the opportunity to study with the world’s best

universities by integrating select MOOCs in a regular degree
PURPOSE programme and providing students full credit transfer, as per university
regulations, if they earn a “Verified / Completion Certificate” and take a
proctored examination through a secure, physical testing center.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To apply the concepts, theories, laws, technologies
f h i j
learnt herein to provide engineering solutions.

Registration process, Assessment and Credit Transfer:

1. Students can register for courses offered by approved global MOOCs platforms
like edX, Coursera or Universities with which SRM partners specifically for
MOOCs.
2. Annually, each department must officially announce, to the students as well as to
the Controller of Examinations, the list of courses that will be recognized and
accepted for credit transfer.
3. The department must also officially announce / appoint one or more faculty
coordinator(s) for advising the students attached to them, monitoring their
progress and assist the department in proctoring the tests, uploading the marks /
grades, and collecting and submitting the graded certificate(s) to the CoE, within
the stipulated timeframe.
4. Student who desires to pursue a course, from the above department-approved
list, through MOOCs must register for that course during the course registration
process of the Faculty of Engineering and Technology, SRM University.
5. The maximum credit limits for course registration at SRM will include the
MOOCs course registered.
6. The student must periodically submit the marks / grades obtained in various
quizzes, assignments, tests etc immediately to the Faculty Advisor or the Course
Coordinator for uploading in the university’s academic module.

138 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
7. The student must take the final test as a Proctored / Supervised test in the
university campus.
8. The student must submit the “Certificate of Completion” as well as the final
overall Marks and / or Grade within the stipulated time for effecting the grade
conversion and credit transfer, as per the regulations. It is solely the
responsibility of the individual student to fulfil the above conditions to earn the
credits.
9. The attendance for this course, for the purpose of awarding attendance grade,
will be considered 100%, if the credits are transferred, after satisfying the above
(1) to (7) norms; else if the credits are not transferred or transferable, the
attendance will be considered as ZERO.

Course nature Online - 100% internal continuous assessment.

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Non-proctored / Proctored /
Assessment
In- Quiz Assignment Unsupervised Supervised Total
tool
semester Tests Test
Weightage 25% 25% 10% 40% 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%
L T P C
15AE491L Industrial Module-II
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

PURPOSE To impart an insight into the current industrial trends and practices
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To obtain an insight into the current industrial trends
and practices
2. To obtain an insight into the technologies adopted
by industries
3. To obtain an insight into the technical problems
encountered by the industries and the scope for
providing solutions.
4. To network with industry

139 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
1. The department will identify and shortlist few C,D,I 1,2,3,
emerging topics that are trending in industry. ,O 4
2. The department will identify experts from
industry who are willing to deliver modules on
the shortlisted topics.
3. The identified expert will assist the department in
formulating the course content to be delivered as
a 30-hour module, prepare lectures notes, ppt,
handouts and other learning materials.
4. The department will arrange to get the necessary
approvals for offering the course, from the
university’s statutory academic bodies well
before the actual offering.
5. The department must officially announce, to the
students as well as to the Controller of
Examinations, the list of courses that will be
offered as industry module.
6. The department must also officially announce /
appoint one or more faculty coordinator(s) for
advising the students attached to them,
monitoring their progress and assist the
department in
proctoring/supervising/assessment the quizzes,
assignments, tests etc, uploading the marks,
attendance etc, within the stipulated timeframe.
7. The Student who desires to pursue a course,
from the above department-approved list, must
register for that course during the course
registration process of the Faculty of Engineering
and Technology, SRM University.
8. The maximum credit limits for course registration
at SRM will include the Industry Module also.
9. All academic requirements of a professional
course like minimum attendance, assessment
methods, discipline etc will be applicable for this
Industry Module.
10. The course will be conducted on week ends or
beyond the college regular working hours.
Total contact hours 30

140 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Course nature 100% internal continuous assessment.
Assessment Method – Theory Component (Weightage 50%)
Assessment
In- Presentation Report Total
tool
semester
Weightage 80% 20% 100%
End semester examination Weightage 0%

141 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 SEMESTER - VII

L T P C
15AE401 Vehicle Dynamics
2 2 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core Design Engineering
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To familiarize the students with the fundamental concepts of vehicular

PURPOSE
dynamics.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the concept of mechanical vibrating
a c e
system
2. Gain knowledge about the suspension and tire
a c e
related vibrations
3. Understand about the stability of vehicle a c e

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Basics of Vibration 8
1. Classification of vibration, definitions 1 C 1 1,3
2. Mechanical vibrating systems 1 C 1 1,3
3. Mechanical vibration and human comfort. 1 C,D 1 1,3
4. Single degree of freedom free vibration 1 C,D 1 1,3
5. Forced and damped vibrations 1 C,D 1 3
6. Magnification factor and transmissibility. 1 C,D 1 3
7. Modeling and simulation studies 1 C,D 1 3
8. Vibration absorber. Vibration measuring 1 C 1 2
instruments.
Unit – IITyres 8
9. Tyre forces and moments 1 C 2 1,2
10. Longitudinal force at various slip angles 1 C,D 2 2
11. Lateral force at various slip angles 1 C,D 2 2
12. Rolling resistance 1 C 2 2
13. Relationship between tractive effort and 1 C,D 2 2
142 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
longitudinal slip of tyres
14. Cornering property of tyre 1 C 2 2
15. The magic formula tyre model 2 C,D 2 2
Unit – III Vertical Dynamics 8
16. Two degree of freedom system 1 C 1 2,3
17. Modal analysis 1 C,D 1 1,2
18. Sources of Vibration 1 C 1 3
19. Modeling of Passive, Semi-active and 2 C,D 1,2 1,2
Active suspension using Quarter car model
20. Half car model and Full car model 2 C,D 1,2 4,5
21. Influence of suspension stiffness, 1 C,D 1,2 4,5
suspension damping, and tyre stiffness.
Unit - IV Longitudinal Dynamics 9
22. Aerodynamic forces and moments 1 C,D 1,3 1,2
23. Equation of motion. Tyre forces, rolling 1 C,D 2 1,6
resistance
24. Load distribution for three wheeler and four 2 C,D 2 5,6
wheeler
25. Calculation of Maximum acceleration, 2 C,D 2,3 1,2
Reaction forces for Different drives.
26. Braking and Driving torque 2 C,D 2,3 1,2
27. Prediction of Vehicle performance to 1 C,D 2,3 2,6
braking.
Unit - V Lateral Dynamics 8
28. Steering geometry. Steady state handling 1 C,D 3 2,5
characteristics
29. Steady state response to steering input. 1 C,D 3 1,2
Transient response characteristics
30. Directional stability of vehicle. 2 C,D 3 1,2
31. Roll center 1 C,D 3 2,6
32. Roll axis, Vehicle under side forces. 1 C,D 3 2,6
33. Effect of suspension on cornering. 2 C,D 2,3 2,5
34. Cycle test-I 1
35. Cycle test-II 2
36. Surprise test 1
Total contact hours 45

143 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Thomas D. Gillespie, “Fundamental of Vehicle Dynamics”, Society of
Automotive Engineers, USA 1992.
2. Rajesh Rajamani, “Vehicle Dynamics and Control”, 1st edition, Springer, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. Singiresu S. Rao, “Mechanical Vibrations” (5th Edition), Prentice Hall, 2010
4. J. Y. Wong, “Theory of Ground Vehicles”, 3rd Edition, Wiley-Interscience, 2001
5. J.G. Giles, “Steering, Suspension and Tyres”, Illiffe Books Ltd., 1968.
6. Hans B.Pacejka, “Tyre and vehicle dynamics”, 2nd edition, Elsevier, 2006.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In- Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise Quiz Total
semester tool test I test II Test III Test
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15AE402 Vehicle Body Engineering and Aerodynamics
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15AE302 / 15AE312
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core Vehicle Technology
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

This course provides the basic knowledge about constructional details

PURPOSE
of vehicle bodies and its aerodynamic structure.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the fundamentals of various automotive
a c e j
body construction details
2. Understand the concepts of aerodynamics in body
a c e j
engineering for better style and low drag.

144 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Car Body Details 8
1. History - Evolution of vehicle body,
Importance of vehicle body, Car Body 1 C 1 1,4
Terminologies & types of car bodies
2. Visibility - Forward visibility, Forward vision
1 C 1 1,4
measurement and Regulations
3. Driver's Visibility, All round visibility of the
vehicle - sensors and its functions, Methods 1 C 1 1,4
of improving visibility
4. Safety - factors influencing safety in traffic,
1 C 1 1,4
Classification - Active & Passive safety
5. Active safety - Driving, Conditional,
Perceptibility & Operational safety Passive 1 C 1 1,4
safety - Interior & Exterior safety
1. Safety aspects in design - Bumper end, front 1 C,D 1 1,4
end, Rear end and importance of larger
distance
2. Air bag, Telescopic/Collapsible Steering 1 C 1 1,4
column
3. Modern Painting process of a passenger car 1 C 1 1,4
body
Unit - II Bus Body Details 8
4. Introduction to bus bodies, Bus body panels 1 C 1 3
& terminologies
5. Classification of bus body based on distance 1 C 1 3
travelled by the vehicle
6. Classification of bus body based on capacity 1 C 1 3
of the vehicle
7. Classification of bus body based on shape 1 C 1 3
and style of the vehicle
8. Classification of bus body based on types of 1 C 1 3
metal section used
9. Bus body regulations & Sequence of bus 1 C 1 3
building operation
10. Construction of conventional type of bus 1 C 1 3
body, Construction of Integral type of bus
body
11. Comparison of Conventional and Integral 1 C 1 3
145 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
type of bus body
Unit - III Car Aerodynamics 8
12. Car Aerodynamics - Introduction and its 1 C 2 2
importance
13. Types of Aerodynamic drag 1 C 2 2
14. Various Forces and moments influencing 1 C 2 2
drag, Effects of forces and moments
15. Various body optimization techniques for 1 C 2 2
minimum drag
16. Wind tunnel technology - Principle & 1 C 2 2
Construction details
17. Types of wind tunnels 1 C 2 2
18. Flow visualization techniques 1 C 2 2
19. Testing with wind tunnel balance (scale 1 I 2 2
models)
Unit - IV Commercial Vehicle Details 8
20. Commercial vehicles - Introduction 1 C 1 1,4
21. Classification of commercial vehicle bodies 1 C 1 1,4
22. Light commercial vehicles and Heavy 1 C 1 1,4
commercial vehicles
23. Dimensions of commercial vehicle driver's 1 C,D 1 1,4
seat in relation to various controls
24. Construction of Tanker and Tipper body, 1 C 1 1,4
Segmental design of driver's cab
25. Design of load carrying capacity of 1 C,D 1 1,4
commercial vehicle body
26. Force exerted by the driver on the controls 1 C 1 1,4
27. Compactness of Driver's cab 1 C 1 1,4
Unit - V Commercial Vehicle 9
Aerodynamics
28. Commercial vehicle aerodynamics - 1 C 1 4
Introduction and its importance
29. Effects of rounding sharp front body edges 1 C 1 4
30. Effects of various cabs on trailer body 1 C 1 4
31. Fore body pressure distribution 1 C 1 4
32. Effects of a cab to trailer body 1 C 1 4
33. Effects of a cab to trailer body roof height 1 C 1 4
34. Effects of a cab to trailer body gab seals 1 C 1 4
146 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
35. Commercial vehicle drag reduction devices 1 C 1 4
36. Cab roof deflectors 1 C 1 4
37. Cycle test-I 1
38. Cycle test-II 2
39. Surprise test 1
Total contact hours 45

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Pawloski J, " Vehicle Body Engineering" - Business Books Ltd.,
2. Wolf-Heinrich Hucho, “Aerodynamics of road vehicles”, 4th edition, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. John Fenton, “Vehicle Body layout and analysis”, Mechanical Engineering
Publication Ltd., 1984
4. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Vehicle Technology”, 2nd edition, Butterworth –
Heinemann, 2002.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise Quiz Total
tool test I test II test III test
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage: 50%

Modelling and control of Electric and Hybrid L T P C

15AE406
vehicles 3 0 0 3
Co-requisite:
Prerequisite: 15AE209
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL CORE
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

147 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 To develop knowledge in designing Electric and Hybrid vehicles using
PURPOSE
Model based design approach
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Get familiarized with various Electric and Hybrid
a b c d e k
power train technology
2. Acquire the design fundamentals involved in
a d e k
Electric and Hybrid vehicle Power train
3. Design and analyze the longitudinal and lateral
a b d e k
handling models of an Electric vehicle
4. Optimize the energy and power management
a b d k
system for electric and hybrid vehicle
5. Illustrate the vehicle dynamics control system
a b e k
involved in an electric and hybrid vehicle
Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
UNIT - I Electric and Hybrid Powertrain
9
Technologies
Introduction to Battery Electric Vehicles
1. (BEV’s) – Powertrain Configuration, 2 C 1 1
Traction, Energy sources and storage
Fuel Cell Electric vehicle (FCEV)
2. 1 C,D 1 1
technologies
Hybrid Electric Vehicles- Degree of
Hybridization, Parallel hybrid, Series Hybrid,
3. 2 C,D 1 1
Power split and compound Hybrid
Configuration
4. Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV’s) 1 C,D 1 1,2
5. Hybrid Hydraulic vehicles (HHV) 1 C,D 1 1
6. Pneumatic Hybrid Vehicles (PHVs) 1 C,D 1 1
7. Power/Energy Management System 1 C,D 1 1,2
UNIT - II Modelling and Characteristics of
9
EV/HEV Powertrain Components
Electric Motor Performance characteristics
–Power and torque generation, Efficiency,
8. DC Motors, Induction AC motors, Steady 3 C 2 1,3
state Performance analysis, Permanent
Magnet AC Motors ,BLDC motors

148 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Battery Performance Characteristics-
Battery Capacity, Open circuit terminal
voltages, Charage and Discharge rates,
9. 3 C,D 2 1,3
SOC, SOD, DOD, Battery Energy Density,
power density, Specific energy and Specific
Power.
10. Inverters and Motor drives 2 C,D 2 1,3
11. Regenerative Braking Characteristics 1 C,D 2 1
UNIT - III Energy Storage 9
Electro chemical batteries- Electro chemical
12. 1 C,D 3 2
reactions
Battery technologies – Lead acid battery,
13. 2 C,D 3 2
Nickel based batteries
Lithium based batteries –Lithium polymer,
14. 3 C,D,I 3 2
Lithium ion
Ultracapacitors –Basic principle,
15. 2 C 3 2
Performance, Ultra High speed flywheels
Fuel cells –Principle, working , requirements
16. 1 C,D 3 2
and specifications
UNIT IV: ENERGY, POWER
a. MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS AND 9
TECHNIQUES FOR EV AND HEV
17. Power /Energy management controllers 1 C,D 4 1
Battery Management system (BMS) for EV
18. 1 C,D 4 1
and HEV
Rule based Control Strategies for HEV and
19. PHEV –Deterministic Rule-based ,Fuzzy 2 C,D 4 1
rule based control strategies
Optimization based Control Strategies –
20. 2 C,D 4 1
Optimization Problem formulation
Global Energy/Power Management
21. 1 C,D 4 1
Optimization
Realtime Energy/Power Management
22. 1 C,D 4 1
Optimization
23. Optimization techniques 1 C,D 4 1
UNIT - V Control of Electric and Hybrid
9
Electric Vehicle Dynamics

149 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics Control
24. (VDC) Systems –Driver, Vehicle, 3 C 5 1
Environment Models
25. Working principle of VDC Systems 2 C,D 5 1
26. VDC System Classification 2 C,D 5 1
VDC implementation on Electric and Hybrid
27. Vehicles-structure of the control system- 2 C,D 5 1
Control system Design and simulation study
Total contact hours 45

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Amir Khajepour, M. Saber Fallah, Avesta Goodarzi-“Electric and Hybrid
Vehicles Technologies, Modeling and Control” - A Mechatronic Approach-Wiley
Publication,2014
2. Iqbal Husain, "Electic and Hybrid vehicles Design Fundamentals" , CRC Press,
second edition 2013
3. James Larminie, John Lowry, "Electric vehicle technology Explained" second
Edition, Wiley Publication, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
4. Ali Emadi, Mehrdad Ehsani, John M. Muller,“Vehicular Electric Power Systems”
Marcel Dekker, Inc., 2004
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
L T P C
15AE404M Multi-Disciplinary Design
2 2 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016
150 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Students of any specialization at an undergraduate level learn courses
related to various sub-domains (Multi-disciplinary) of their specialization
individually. They are not exposed to understanding how the various
multi-disciplinary fields interact and integrate in real life situations. It is
very common that an expert in a particular domain models and designs
systems or products oblivious of the impact of other subsystems. This
lack of multi-disciplinary thinking is very blatantly visible when the
PURPOSE students take up their major project during their final year. This course
aims to develop appropriate skills on systemic thinking on how to identify
and formulate a problem, decompose the problem into smaller elements,
conceptualize the design, evaluate the conceptual design by using
scientific, engineering and managerial tools, select, analyze and interpret
the data, consideration of safety, socio-politico-cultural, risks and hazards,
disposal, regional and national laws, costing and financial model and
undertake documentation and finally presentation.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To subdivide a complex system into smaller disciplinary
models, manage their interfaces and reintegrate them a c e f i l
into an overall system model
2. To rationalize a system architecture or product design
problem by selecting appropriate design variables, a c e f i l
parameters and constraints
3. To design for value and quantitatively assess the
a c e f i l
expected lifecycle cost of a new system or product
4. To take on the challenges of teamwork, prepare a
presentation in a professional manner, and document a c e f i l
all aspects of design work.

Contact
Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference
hours
1 Introduction: Facilitating
Multidisciplinary Projects
2 Identifying and formulating a problem
3 System Modelling
4 Thinking perspectives: C,D,I,O 1,2,3,4
Decomposition–Composition Thinking
Hierarchical Thinking, Organizational
Thinking, Life-Cycle Thinking, Safety
Thinking, Risk Thinking, Socio-politico-
cultural thinking, Environment thinking
151 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact
Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference
hours
5 Decomposing a system – Identifying
the major sub-systems
6 Mathematical Modeling and Governing
equations for each sub systems
7 Objectives, Constraints and Design
Variables
8 Conceptual Design
9 Collaborative Design – Disciplinary
teams satisfy the local constraints
while trying to match the global
constraints set by the project
coordinator.
10 Tools for modeling, designing,
analysis, data interpretation, decision
making etc
11 Design Analysis, evaluation and
selection
12 Costing and Financial model
13 Documentation, reviewing and
presentation
Total contact hours 60
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. No. REFERENCES
1. Systems Design and Engineering: Facilitating Multidisciplinary
Development Projects
2. G. Maarten Bonnema, Karel T. Veenvliet, Jan F. Broenink December 15,
2015, CRC Press ISBN 9781498751261
3. Exploring Digital Design-Multi-Disciplinary Design Practices, Ina
Wagner , Tone Bratteteig , Dagny Stuedahl, Springer-Verlag London,
2010, ISSN:1431-1496
Additional references can be included by the respective departments
based on the domain and / or theme.
Course nature Predominantly Practice complimented by theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In- Assessment
Review 1 Review 2 Review 3 Review 4 Total
semester tool
Weightage 10% 25% 25% 40% 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%
152 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Pedagogy:
Theme or major/broad domains will be announced by the department every semester.
Multi-disciplinary designs will be made by the students in groups (group size may be
decided by the course coordinator), with the topic of interest falling within the theme
or major/broad domains as announced by the department, applying any combinations
of the disciplines in engineering. 3D modelling and / or simulation must be used to
validate the design.
In a combination of lecture and hands-on experiences, students must be exposed to
understand and analyse engineering designs (or products) and systems, their
realization process and project management. Analysis of the design criteria for safety,
ergonomics, environment, life cycle cost and sociological impact is to be covered.
Periodic oral and written status reports are required. The course culminates in a
comprehensive written report and oral presentation. If required guest lecturers from
industry experts from the sub-domains may be arranged to provide an outside
perspective and show how the system design is being handled by the industry. The
Conceive Design Implement Operate (CDIO) principles must be taught to the
students.
A full-scale fabrication is not within the purview /scope of this course. Of course this
design, if scalable and approved by the department, can be extended as the major
project work
This course is 100% internal continuous assessment.
L T P C
15AE401L Vehicle Dynamics Laboratory
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: 15AE401
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core Design Engineering
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To understand the various dynamic behavior of road vehicles under various

PURPOSE
loading conditions and its computer simulation using computer aided tools.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the fundamentals of computer aided tools
b d e k
for numerical simulations.
2. Improve their ability in solving vehicle dynamics
b d e k
problems using simulation tools.
3. Equip themselves familiar with lateral and longitudinal
b d e k
dynamics.
153 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Sl. Contact C-D-
Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours I-O
1. Introduction to computer Aided simulation 3 D,I,O 1 2
tools
2. Numerical simulation of suspensions 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3
parameter optimizations
3. Multi body dynamic simulation of half car 3 D,I,O 1-3 1-3
4. Numerical simulation of steering system 3 D,I,O 1-3 1-3
5. Multi body dynamic simulation of a HCV 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3
6. Suspension test 3 I,O 3 1,3
7. Steering test 3 I,O 3 1,3
8. Damper test 3 I,O 3 1,3
9. Centre of gravity test 3 I,O 3 1,3
10. Brake test 3 I,O 3 1,3
Total contact hours 30

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. REFERENCES
No.
1. Laboratory Manual
2. Computer aided simulation tool tutorials
3. Gillespie T, “Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics”, Society of Automotive
Engineers (SAE)”, 1992.

Course nature Practical

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In- Assessment Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model Total
semester tool Voce examination
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%

L T P C
15AE406L Electric Vehicular Systems Laboratory
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017
154 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 To Enrich the students with knowledge of Electric Vehicle technology
PURPOSE
and respective simulation tools and hardware.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand about simulation tools and rapid a b e
control prototyping technique
2. Explore the interfacing techniques available in a b e
control prototyping hardware
3. Perform the testing and validation of Battery and a b d e
Motors used in Electric vehicle
4. Control the speed and orientation of motors used a b d e
in Electric vehicles
5. Design an Complete feedback system for Electric a b d e
vehicle application

Sl. Contact C-D-I-

Description of experiments IOs Reference
No. hours O
Introduction to Virtual C,I,
1. Instrumentation and Rapid control 2 O 1 1,3
prototyping hardware.
Control prototyping using graphical C,I,
2. 2 1 1,3
programming methods O
Data acquisition using data C,I,
3. loggers and virtual instrumentation 2 O 2 1,3
hardware
Interfacing Analog input ,Signal C,I,
4. conditioning using control 2 O 2 1,3
hardware
Control of actuators with Rapid I,O
5. 2 2 1,3
control prototyping hardware.
Testing and validation of Electric I,O
6. 2 3 1,3
Vehicle Battery
Testing and Validation of Electric I,O
7. Motor for power assisted Steering 2 3 1,3
system
Speed control for Electric Vehicle I,O
8. 2 4 1,3
motors
Direction control of Electric Vehicle I,O
9. 2 4 1,3
motors

155 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Electronic differential Design for I,O
10. 2 5 1,3
Electric Vehicles
Total contact hours 20
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Electric vehicle Laboratory Manual
2. Iqbal Husain, "Electic and Hybrid vehicles Design Fundamentals" , CRC
Press, second edition 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. NI Systems “Compact Rio” Lab Manual

Course nature Practical

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In- Assessment Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Model Total
semester tool Voce examination
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%

L T P C
15AE391L Industrial Training-II
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

To provide short-term work experience in an Industry/ Company/

PURPOSE
Organisation
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To get an inside view of an industry and
j
organization/company
2. To gain valuable skills and knowledge j
3. To make professional connections and enhance
f g
networking
4. To get experience in a field to allow the student to
i
make a career transition

156 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 C-
Contact
Session Description of Topic D-I- IOs Reference
hours
O
1. It is mandatory for every student to D, 1,2,3,4
undergo this course. I,O
2. Every student is expected to spend
a minimum of 15-days in an
Industry/ Company/ Organization,
during the summer vacation.
3. The type of industry must be NOT
below the Medium Scale category in
his / her domain of the degree
programme.
4. The student must submit the
“Training Completion Certificate”
issued by the industry / company /
Organisation as well as a technical
report not exceeding 15 pages,
within the stipulated time to be
eligible for making a presentation
before the committee constituted by
the department.
5. The committee will then assess the
student based on the report
submitted and the presentation
made.
6. Marks will be awarded out of
maximum 100.
7. Appropriate grades will be assigned
as per the regulations.
8. Only if a student gets a minimum of
pass grade, appropriate credit will
be transferred towards the degree
requirements,
Total contact hoursas per the regulations.
9. It is solely the responsibility of the
individual student
Course nature to fulfill
Training – 100% the internal
above continuous assessment
conditions to earn the credits.
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
10. The attendance for this course, for
Assessment
In- the purpose ofPresentation
awarding attendance Report Total
tool
semester grade, will be considered 100%, if
Weightage 80% 20% 100%
the credits are transferred, after
End semester examination
satisfying the above (1) to (8) norms; Weightage : 0%
else if the credits are157
not transferred B.Tech Automobile Engg.
or transferable, the attendance will (Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
be considered as ZERO.
11. The committee must recommend
redoing the course, if it collectively
 SEMESTER - VII

L T P C
15AE496L Major Project
0 0 24 12
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval 32nd Academic Council Meeting, 23rd July 2016

The Major Project experience is the culminating academic endeavor of

students who earn a degree in their Undergraduate Programs. The
project provides students with the opportunity to explore a problem or
issue of particular personal or professional interest and to address that
problem or issue through focused study and applied research under the
PURPOSE direction of a faculty member. The project demonstrates the student's
ability to synthesize and apply the knowledge and skills acquired in
his/her academic program to real-world issues and problems. This final
project affirms students' ability to think critically and creatively, to solve
practical problems, to make reasoned and ethical decisions, and to
communicate effectively.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To provide students with the opportunity to apply the
knowledge and skills acquired in their courses to a a c e f i
specific problem or issue.
2. To allow students to extend their academic experience
into areas of personal interest, working with new ideas, a c e f i
issues, organizations, and individuals.
3. To encourage students to think critically and creatively
about academic, professional, or social issues and to
a c e f h i
further develop their analytical and ethical leadership
skills necessary to address and help solve these issues.
4. To provide students with the opportunity to refine
research skills and demonstrate their proficiency in a c e f g i
written and/or oral communication skills.
5. To take on the challenges of teamwork, prepare a
presentation in a professional manner, and document all d g
aspects of design work.
158 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
Session Description of Topic Contact C-D-I- IOs Reference
hours O
1. The Major project is a major C,D,I,O 1,2,3,4,
component of our engineering 5
curriculum: it is the culmination of
the program of study enabling the
students to showcase the
knowledge and the skills they have
acquired during the previous four
years, design a product/service of
significance, and solve an open-
ended problem in engineering.
2. Each student must register to the
project course related to his or her
program
3. Major Project course consists of
one semester and would be
allowed to register only during the
final year of study.
4. The Major Project may be initiated
during the pre-final semester but
will be assessed and credits
transferred only during the last
semester of study, upon
completion of all other degree
requirements. Generally the
undergraduate major project is a
team based one.
5. Each team in the major project
course will consist of maximum of
5 students.
6. Each project will be assigned a
faculty, who will act as the
supervisor.
7. The project shall be driven by
realistic constraints like that related
to economic, environmental, social,
political, ethical, health & safety,
manufacturability and
sustainability.
8. Each group must document and

159 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 implement a management
structure. Group leadership roles
must be clearly identified including
who has responsibility for
monitoring project deliverables and
group coordination.
1. A group project may be
interdisciplinary, with students
enrolled in different engineering
degrees, or in Engineering plus
other faculties such as
Management, Medical and Health
Sciences, Science and
Humanities.
2. Each student team is expected to
maintain a log book that would
normally be used to serve as a
record of the way in which the
project progressed during the
course of the session.
3. Salient points discussed at
meetings with the supervisor (i.e.,
suggestions for further meetings,
changes to experimental
procedures) should be recorded by
the student in order to provide a
basis for subsequent work.
4. The logbook may be formally
assessed;
5. The contribution of each individual
team member will be clearly
identified and the weightage of this
component will be explicitly
considered while assessing the
work done.
6. A project report is to be submitted
on the topic which will be
evaluated during the final review.
7. Assessment components will be as
spelt out in the regulations.
8. The department will announce a

160 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 marking scheme for awarding
marks for the different sections of
the report.
9. The project report must possess
substantial technical depth and
require the students to exercise
analytical, evaluation and design
skills at the appropriate level.
Total contact hours

Course nature Project – 100 % Internal continuous Assessment

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Review 1 Review 2 Review 3 Total
Weightage 10% 15% 20% 45%
End Project
Assessment Tool Viva Voce
semester Report
examination Weightage : 25% 30% 55%

161 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Department Electives
Vehicular Electronics and Control Technology

L T P C
15AE253E Principles Of Linear Systems And Signals
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: 15AE208
Prerequisite:
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE Automotive Electronics
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

To enable the students to understand the concepts of Linear time

PURPOSE invariant (LTI) systems and to introduce the mathematical tools to
analyze the LTI system.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Acquire the fundamentals of signal operation and
a b d e k
basics of system
2. Perform time domain analysis of a continuous time
a b e k
system
3. Analyze the continuous time systems using Laplace
a d e k
transforms
4. Analyze the discrete time using Z-transforms a b d k
5. Know the fundamentals involved in continuous time
a b d e k
signal analysis

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Signals and Systems 9
Size of a signal – Signal Energy,
1. 1 C 1 1,2
Signal Power
Signal Operations –Time shifting,
2. Time scaling, Time reversal, 2 C,D 1 1,2
combined operation

162 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Classification of signals –Continuous-
time, Discrete-time signals, Analog
and Digital signals, Periodic and
3. 2 C,D 1 1,2
Aperiodic signals, Energy and Power
signals, Deterministic and Random
signals
Excitation signals- Unit Step function,
4. Unit impulse function and Exponential 2 C,D 1 1,2
function
Even functions and Odd functions-
5. 1 C 3 1,2
properties
Classification of system –Linear and
nonlinear systems, Time invariant,
6. time varying, Instantaneous and 1 C 4 1,2
dynamic, causal and noncausal
system, Analog and Digital system
Unit - II Time Domain Analysis of
9
Continous Time Systems
System response to internal condition
7. 1 C 2 1
–Zero input response
8. Unit Impulse response 1 C,D 2 1
System response to external input –
9. Zero state response –Convolution 1 C,D 2 1
integral
System stability –Internal Asymptotic
10. stability, Relationship between BIBO 3 C,D 2 1
and asymptotic stability.
Dependence of system behavior on
11. 2 C,D 2 1
characteristics modes
Response time of system –time
12. constant, rise time, resonance 1 C,D ,2 1
phenomenon.
Unit - III Continuous Time System
9
Analysis Using Laplace Transform
Laplace transform –inverse Laplace
13. 1 C,D 3 1,2
transform
Properties of the Laplace transform –
Time shifting, frequency shifting, time
14. differentiation property, time 3 C,D 3 1,2
integration property, Time convolution
and frequency convolution
163 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Solution of differential and integro-
differential equation –Zero state
15. 1 C,D 3 1,2
response, stability and Inverse
system
System realization-Application to
16. 1 C 3 1,2
simple feedback control system
Frequency response of an LTIC
17. 3 C,D 3 1,2
system
Unit - IV Discrete Time Analysis
9
Using Z-Transform
Z-Transform and finding inverse
18. 1 C 4 1,2
transform
19. Properties of Z-transform 1 C 4 1,2
Z-transform solution of linear
difference equations –Zero-state of
20. 2 C,D 4 1,2
LTID system,Stability and Inverse
system
Frequency response of discrete time
systems –Periodic nature of
21. 1 C,D 4 1
frequency response, Aliasing and
sampling rate
Frequency response from pole-zero
22. 1 C,D 4 1
location
Connection between Laplace
23. 1 C,D 4 1
transform and z-transform
24. Bilateral Z-transform -Properties 1 C,D 4 1
25. Analysis using Bilateral Z-transform 1 C,D 4 1
Unit - V Continuous Time Signal
9
Analysis
Periodic signal representation by
26. 1 C 5 1
Fourier series
27. Fourier spectrum, Effect of symmetry 1 C,D 5 1
Convergence of Fourier series,
28. Exponential Fourier spectra and 1 C,D 5 1
parseval theorem
LTIC System response to periodic
29. 1 C,D 5 1
inputs
Aperiodic signal representation by
30. 2 C,D 5 1
Fourier integral

164 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Connection between the Fourier and
31. 2 C,D 5 1
Laplace transform
32. Properties for Fourier transform 1 C,D 5 1
33. Cycle Test 1 1
34. Cycle Test 2 2
35. Surprise Test
Total contact hours 45

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. B.P. Lathi “Principles Of Linear Systems And Signals “ Oxford University Press
2009.
2. Allan V.Oppenheim, S.Wilsky and S.H.Nawab, “Signals and Systems”, Pearson,
2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. R.E.Zeimer, W.H.Tranter and R.D.Fannin, “Signals & Systems - Continuous and
Discrete”, Pearson, 2007.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

Power Electronics For Electric Vehicle L T P C

15AE254E
Applications 3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite:
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE Automotive Electronics
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

165 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 To understand the importance and use of Power electronics devices
PURPOSE
and circuits for Electric vehicle applications
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the various applications of electronic
devices for conversion, control and conditioning of a b e k
the electrical power
2. Get an overview of different types of power
semiconductor devices and their dynamic a e k
characteristics.
3. Familiarize with the operation, characteristics and
a b e k
performance parameters of controlled rectifiers
4. Illustrate the operation, switching techniques and
a e k
basics topologies of DC-DC switching regulators.
5. Design the motor drives for motor control
a b e k
applications

Conta C-D-I-
Referenc
Session Description of Topic ct O IOs
e
hours
UNIT - I Automotive Semiconductor
9
Devices,
1. Introduction 1 C 1 1
Diodes - Rectification, Freewheeling, and
2. 1 C,D 1 1
Clamping Devices
Power MOSFETs - Low-Voltage Load
3. 1 C,D 1 1
Drivers
4. IGBTs - High-Voltage Power Switches 1 C,D 1 1
Power Integrated Circuits and Smart
5. 2 C,D 1 1
Power Devices.
Emerging Device Technologies - Super-
6. 2 C,D 1 1,2
Junction and SiC Devices
Power Losses and Thermal C,D
7. 1 1 1
Management ,I
UNIT - II AC -DC Converters 9
8. DC-DCConverter 1 C 2 1
Buck, Boost, and Buck-Boost Converter
9. 2 C,D 2 1,2
Commonalities
10. Buck Converter ,Boost Converter 2 C,D 2 1,2
11. Buck-Boost Converter 1 C,D 2 1
166 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
12. Push-Pull Converter 1 C,D,I 2
13. AC- AC Converters 2 C,D,I 2 1,2
UNIT III:AC-DC Rectifiers 9
Diode AC-DC Rectifier-Characteristics
14. 1 C,D 3 1
and Circuit Configuration
Analysis of Three-Phase Full-Bridge
15. 2 C,D 3 1
Diode Rectifier
16. Design of Dynamic Breaking Unit 1 C,D 3 1
17. Calculation of DC-Link Power 1 C 3 1
18. Thyristor AC-DC Rectifier 2 C,D 3 1
19. TopologyandOperationModes 1 C,D 3 1
20. FireAngleControlScheme 1 C,D 3 1
UNIT IV:DC - ACInverters 9
21. DC-to-AC Conversion,Types of Inverters 1 C 4 1,2
Voltage Source Inverters-Single phase
22. 1 C,D 4 1
inverters
Voltage Source Inverters -Three phase
23. 2 C,D 4 1
inverters
24. Current Source inverters 1 C 4 1
Voltage Control Techniques - Sinusoidal
25. 1 C,D 4 1
PWM (SPWM) Technique
Current control techniques - Hysteresis
26. 1 C 4 1
Current Control
27. Multilevel inverters 1 C 4 1
28. Hard Switching Effects 1 C 4 1
UNIT V:Automotive Motor Drives 9
29. DC motor drives-introduction 1 C 4 1
Torque Production in Brushed DC-Motor
30. 2 C 4 1
Drives
31. Induction Motor Drives -Introduction 1 C 4 1,2
Torque and speed control of Induction -
32. 2 C,D 4 1,2
Motor Drives
Fundamentals of Scalar and vector
33. 2 C,D 4 1
control for induction motors
Induction motor drives for Electric
34. 1 C,D 4 1
Vehicles
Total contact hours 45

167 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. No. TEXT BOOKS
1. Ali_Emadi” Handbook of automotive power electronics and motor drives”,
3rd Edition, 2014
2. Ned Mohan, T.M.Undeland, W.P.Robbins,” Power Electronics:
Converters,applications and design”, John wiley and Sons, 3rd Edition,
2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications”,
Prentice Hall India, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2004

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Surprise
In- Cycle test I Cycle test II Quiz Total
tool Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15AE351E Automotive Fault Diagnostics
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category Vehicular Electronics and Control
P Professional Elective
Technology
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

To understand the importance and procedure of fault diagnostics in for

PURPOSE
automotive field.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the concept of fault diagnosis a b d k
Understand about on and off board
2. a c k
diagnostics
3. Perform fault diagnosis in automobiles a d e k
Understand the various advances in fault
4. a e k
diagnosis

168 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Introduction Fault Diagnosis 8
1. Introduction To Fault Diagnosis, Safe 1 C 1 1,2
Working Practices And Techniques
2. Diagnostics On Paper, Mechanical And 1 C,D 1 1,2
Electrical Diagnostic Techniques
3. Faults Codes, Systems And Standards 1 C,D 1 1,2
4. On - And - Off Board Diagnostics 1 C,D 1 1
5. Data Sources, Tools And Equipments 1 C,D 1 1
6. Oscilloscopes, Scanners/Fault Code 2 C,D 1 1,2
Readers, Engine Analyzers
7. Application Methods And Procedures 1 C,D 1 1
Unit -II On and off Board Diagnostics 8
8. Introduction To Oscilloscope Diagnostics 1 C 2 1,2
9. Sensors And Actuators Associated With 1 C,D 2 1,2
Oscilloscope Diagnostics
10. On-Board Diagnostics Various Perspectives 2 C,D 2 1,2
11. Petrol/Gasoline On-Board Diagnostics 1 C,D 2 1
12. On-Board Sensors And Actuators 1 C,D 2 1,2
13. Sensors And Actuators Comparative Case 2 C,D 1,2 1,2
Study
Unit - III Engine System Diagnosis 8
14. Introduction Engine Systems Diagnostics 1 C,D 3 2
15. Engine Operation And Fuel System 1 C,D 3 2,3
16. Ignition System And Emission System 1 C,D 3 2,3
17. Fuel Injection, Starting And Charging 1 C 3 2,3
System
18. Power Flow Control And Energy Efficiency 1 C,D 3 3
Analysis
19. Engine Management And Faultfinding 2 C,D 3 2
Information
20. Air Supply, Exhaust System, Cooling And 1 C,D 3 2,3
Lubrication System
Unit - IV Chassis and Brake System 8
Diagnosis
21. Introduction To Engine System Diagnostics 1 C 3 2,3
22. Anti-Lock Braking System Diagnostics 1 C,D 3 2,3
23. Traction Control System Diagnostics, 1 C,D 3 2,3
Steering And Tires
169 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 24. Transmission Systems Diagnostics 2 C,D 3 2,3
25. Diagnostics On Steering And Tires 2 C,D 3 2,3
26. Case Study On Diagnostics Of Sub 2 C,D 3 2,3
Assemblies
Unit – V Electrical Systems Diagnosis 9
27. Introduction To Electronic Components And 1 C 3,4 4
Circuits
28. Multiplexing And De Multiplexing 1 C,D 3,4 4
29. Lighting System Faults And Auxiliary Faults 1 C,D 3,4 4
30. In-Car Entertainment Security And 1 C,D 3,4 4
Communications Implementation
31. Body-Electrical Systems, Instruments 1 C,D 3,4 4
System Faults
32. Heating Ventilation And Air Conditioning 2 C,D 3,4 4
33. Cruise Control, Air Bags And Belt 2 C,D 3,4 4
Tensioners
34. Cycle test-I 1
35. Cycle test-II 2
36. Surprise test 1
Total contact hours 45

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Tom denton “Advanced automotive fault diagnosis”,Elsevier butterworth-
heinemann linacre house, jordan hill, oxford ox2 8dp, uk - isbn-10:0-75-066991-8
2. Tom Denton “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, - - McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.;
2nd Revised edition 1999, ISBN10:0070344531
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. Routledge “Automobile Electrical and Electronic Systems”, 4 edition 2012,
ISBN10: 0080969429
4. Newnes “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 6th Revised edition
2003,ISBN10:0750675993

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination weightage : 50%
170 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 L T P C
15AE352E Automotive Communication Protocols
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15AE252E
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Vehicular Electronics And Control
Elective Technology
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

To understand the various inter and intra-vehicular communications

PURPOSE
protocols and associated technologies.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand vehicular communication networks a d e
2. Understand the physical layer and working of
a d e
CAN,LIN protocols
3. Understand the technologies of in-vehicle and
a d e
inter-vehicle networks

Contact C-D-I-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours O
Unit - I Introduction to Vehicle 8
Communications
1. Introduction To Intra-Vehicle 1 C 1 1
Communication Protocols And Functions
2. Communications Protocols-Communication 3 C 1 1
Between Sensors And Systems (Power
Train, Chassis Systems, Body Electronics,
Instrument Clusters, Infotainment Systems)
3. Inter-Vehicle Communications-Co 2 C 1 1
Operative Driving (Accident Warning,
Frontal/Rear Collision Prevention, Lane
Change, Assistance).
4. Consumer Assistance –Traffic Information, 2 C 1 1
Multimedia Support And Smart Parking
Unit - II Communication Fundamentals 8
and Technologies

171 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
5. Communication Fundamentals – 1 C,D 3 1
Frequency, Bandwidth, Power
Measurement, SNR, Transmission Rate
Constraints
6. Radio Frequency Spectrum allocation— 3 C 1,3 1
RADAR Operation, Types of RADAR –
Laser RADAR, Collision avoidance RADAR
,IEEE Wireless LAN standards.
7. Communication Technologies – 2 C 3 1
Transmission Technologies, GSM, CDMA,
Bluetooth, WLAN
8. MANET-Mesh Networking, Networking 2 C 3 1
formation and Area of coverage
Unit - III Local Interconnect Network and 8
Controller Area Network
9. LIN –Goals and Applications 1 C 2 1
10. LIN Specification-Physical Layer, Master 1 C 2 1
Slave relationship, Data link Layer.
11. CAN Evolution, Versions, Types of 1 C 2 1
Controllers, Layered Architecture
12. CAN Bus Signaling states, Physical Layer, 1 C 2 1
Data Transmission, Bus speed and
Termination, Cable Connectors.
13. CAN Message Frames-Data Frame, Bit 1 C,D 2 1
stuffing, Remote Frame ,Error Frame,
Overload Frame, CAN Bus Arbitration
14. Error Handling and Error Detecting 1 C,D 2 1
Mechanism
15. CAN Controller Operation-Controller states, 2 C,D 2 1
Mode Control, Counter Updating, Receive-
Transmit error counter
Unit – IV Intra-Vehicle Communications 8
16. Wired Communication – Network 1 C 3 1
Comparison, Two Tier Approach
17. LIN Applications- Localized vehicle area 1 C 3 1
support, General Support areas
18. CAN Applications- In vehicle operation, 2 C 3 1
Infotainment
19. Wireless Communication –Bluetooth 2 C 3 1
Vehicle applications

172 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 20. Satellite Services –Satellite Radio, Vehicle 2 C 3 1
Care, Traffic Status
Unit - V Inter-Vehicle Communication 9
21. Adhoc Communications –Applications in 2 C,D 3 1
Vehicle traffic Monitoring, Collision and
congestion avoidance, Highway lane
reservation, Emission Control
22. Vehicle Frequency Utilization –AM Radio, 2 C 3 1
Bluetooth, FM Radio, GPS, Short range
RADAR, Wireless LAN
23. Intelligent Roadway-Infrastructure to 2 C,D 3 1
vehicle and vehicle to vehicle
communications.
24. Evolving Smart Vehicle – ECU, Wireless 3 C 3 1
Networking, Forward RADAR, Side
RADAR, GPS, Cellular transmission and
Event Recorder.
25. Cycle test-I 1
26. Cycle test-II 2
27. Surprise test 1
Total contact hours 45

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Gilbert Held “Inter and Intra Vehicle Communications”, Auerbach
Publications,2008
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
2. Tao Zhang , Luca Delgrossi “Vehicle Safety Communications Protocols,
Security, and Privacy”.,Information Communication technology series,2012
3. Mohamed Kassab “Communication Technologies for Vehicles” Springer, 2015

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise Quiz Total
tool test I test II III Test
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

173 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 L T P C
15AE353E Artificial Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category Vehicular Electronics and Control
P Professional Elective
Technology
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

To understand the Concepts and applications of Artificial Neural

PURPOSE
Network and Fuzzy Logic.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the concept of Neural Network Models and a e k
Learning algorithm
2. Understand the concepts and implementation of fuzzy a e k
logic and fuzzy logic controllers
3. Understand Hybrid systems such as Neuro fuzzy a e k
systems
4. Understand basic Hardware implementation of Fuzzy a b e k
and neuron
Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Introduction To Neural Networks 8
1. Introduction to ANN 1 C 1 1,2
2. Structure of Neural Network 1 C 1 2
3. Output of a Neuron 1 C 1 2
4. Supervised and unsupervised learning 1 C 1 2
5. Perception and Multilayer Perception 1 C 1 1
6. Feed forward Network and Hopfield Network 1 C 1 1,2
7. Neural Network Models –Adaline, Madaline 2 C,D 1 2
and Back propagation Network
Unit - II Neural Network Models 8
8. Neural Network-Feed Forward Back 1 C 1 1
Propagation Network Application
9. Layers In Neural Network-Single Layer, 1 C 1 1,2
Multilayer
10. XOR Function And Linear Separability 1 C 1 1,2
174 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
11. Threshold Functions-Sigmoid Function, Step 1 C 1 2
Function, Ramp Function And Linear
Function
12. Function Approximation With Neural 1 C 1 3
Networks
13. System Identification With Neural Networks 1 C 1 3
14. Control With Neural Networks 2 C 1 3
Unit - III Fuzzy Sets And Fuzzy Relations 8
15. Basic Concepts Of Classical Sets, Set 1 C,D 2 1
Operation, Boolean Logic
16. Basics Of Fuzzy Sets, Other Representation 1 C,D 2 1
Of Fuzzy Sets
17. Fuzzy Membership Function-Trapezoidal, 1 C,D 2 1
Gaussian And Its Determination
18. Fuzzy Set Properties, Operations –Logic 1 C 2 1
Operation And Algebraic Operations.
19. Introduction To Classical Relations And 1 C 2 1
Reasoning
20. Fundamentals Of Fuzzy Relations – 1 C,D 2 1
Operation On Binary Fuzzy Relation
21. Types Of Fuzzy Relations And Fuzzy 2 C,D 2 1
Reasoning
Unit - IV Embedded Fuzzy Application 8
22. Introduction to conventional Control System 4 C,D 2 1
–Description, Analysis, Design and PID
control
23. Fuzzy logic Controller (FLC) –Description, 3 C,D 2 1
Design, Fuzzification, Knowledge base and
Defuzzification –Analysis with computer
aided Tools.
24. Case study on Fuzzy logic Controller for 1 C,D 2 1
Automotive Embedded System application.
Unit - V Hybrid Systems And Hardware 9
Implementation
25. Introduction to Hybrid Systems, Fuzzy 1 C 3 1
Neuron
26. Multilayer FNN architectures 1 C 3 1

27. Fuzzy ART, Fuzzy ARTMAP 1 C 3 1

28. Neural-Fuzzy system and its applications 1 C 3 1
29. Hardware Implementation –Analog 3 C,D 4 1
175 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Techniques, Digital Techniques
30. Fuzzy Memory and OP-Amp based 2 C,D 4 1
implementation of basic Neuron Model
31. Cycle test-I 1
32. Cycle test-II 2
33. Surprise test 1
Total contact hours 45

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Ahmad.M.Ibrahim “Fuzzy logic for Embedded System application” -Newness
2004,ISBN: 0-7506-7699-
2. Valluru B.Rao “ C++,Neural Network and Fuzzy logic”., -M&T Books ,IDG
books Worldwide,ISBN1558515526
3. M.Gopal “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”-2nd edition, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing,2006
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
4. Simon Haykin “ Neural Networks and Learning Machines –3rd Edition-
Pearson Prentice Hall-ISBN-13: 978-0131471399.
5. Guanrong Chen “Introduction to Fuzzy Sets,Fuzzy logic and Fuzzy control
System” Trung Tat Pham-CRC Press -ISBN 0-8493-1658-8

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise
Quiz Total
In-semester tool test I test II III Test
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

State space Analysis And Digital Control L T P C

15AE355E
System 3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: 15AE209
Prerequisite:
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE Automotive Electronics
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

176 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 To Learn the fundamental concepts of state space modelling, analysis
PURPOSE
and digital control system design for automotive applications.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Learn the basics of discrete systems and digital
a b c d e k
control
2. Design and implement digital controllers for
a d e k
discrete time models
3. Formulate state space models for dynamics
a b d e k
system.
4. Acquire the fundamentals of pole placement
a b d k
design and state observers
5. Explore the techniques involved in optimal control
a b e k
design

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Signal Processing in
9
Digital Control
Control system terminologies – C
1. Classical approach to analog 1 1 1
controller design
Configuration of basic digital control C,D
system scheme –Basic discrete
2. time signals, Time domain models 1 1 1
of discrete time system, Transfer
function Models
Stability on z-plane and the Jury C,D
3. 2 1 1
stability criterion
4. Sampling as impulse Modulation 1 C,D 1 1,2
Practical aspects of the choice of C,D
5. 1 3 1
sampling rate
6. Principles of Discretization 1 C,D 4 1,2
Routh Stability criterion on the r- C,D
7. 2 3 1,2
plane
Unit - II Models of Digital Control
9
Systems and Algorithm
Z-domain description of sampled
8. 1 2 1,2
continuous time plant C

177 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Z-domain description of system with C,D
9. 1 2 1
dead-time
Implementation of Digital controllers C,D
10. 1 2 1
–Tunable PID controller
Digital temperature control and C,D
11. 3 2 1
position control system
Z-plane specification for control C,D
12. 2 2 1
system design
Introduction to digital compensator C,D
13. design using frequency response 1 ,2 1
plots and root locus plots
Unit - III Control System Analysis
9
With State Variable Methods
14. Introduction to state space analysis 1 C,D 3 1
State variable representation of C,D
15. 3 3 1,2
system
Conversion of transfer function to C,D,I
state variable model and canonical
16. 1 3 1
state variable to transfer function
model
Concepts of controllability and C
17. 1 3 1,2
observability
Multivariable system and Digital C,D
18. 3 3 1
state space Models
Unit - IV Pole Placement Design
9
and State Observers
Stability improvement by state C,D
19. 1 3 1,2
feedback
Necessary and sufficient conditions C,D
20. 1 3 1
for arbitrary pole-placement
21. State regulator design 2 C,D 3 1,2
22. Design of state observers 1 C,D 3 1
23. State feedback with integral control 1 C,D 3 1
Digital control system with state C,D
24. 1 3 1
feedback
Dead beat control by state feedback C,D
25. 1 3 1
and Dead beat observers
Introduction to system identification C,D
26. 1 3 1
and adaptive control

178 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Unit - V Lyapunov Stability
9
Analysis and Optimal Control
Basic stability definitions and C
27. 1 4 1,2
theorems
Lyapunov functions for linear and C,D
28. 1 4 1
nonlinear systems
Parameter Optimization and optimal C,D
29. 1 4 1
control problems
30. Quadratic Performance index 1 C,D 4 1
State regulator design through C,D
31. 2 4 1
lyapunov equation
Optimal state regulator through the C,D
32. 2 4 1,2
matrix riccati equation
33. Optimal digital control systems 1 C,D 4 1
Total contact hours 45

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. M Gopal “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, 4th edition,Tata McGraw
Hill Education Pvt.Ltd. 2012
2. Katsuhiko Ogata “Discrete time control system” 2nd edition ,Prentice Hall
Pvt.Ltd,2012
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. J.Nagrath and M.Gopal, “Control System Engineering”, New Age International
Publishers, 5th Edition, 2007.
4. Richard.C.Dorf and Robert.H.Bishop , “Modern Control System” 12th edition
Pearson Prentice Hall,2013.
5. Benjamin.C.Kuo, “Automatic control systems”, Prentice Hall of India, 7th
Edition,1995.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

179 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 L T P C
15AE356E Automotive Development Process
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite:
Prerequisite: 15AE209
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE Automotive Electronics
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

To understand the importance of development and design processes

PURPOSE
involved in automotive industry.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the various methods in Automotive
a b e k
development process
2. Get an overview of different types of simulation tool a e k
3. Get familiarize the operation of service and
a b e k
production integration
4. Acquire knowledge in the operation of management
a e k
process on vehicle development
5. Learn the importance and usage of standard
development processes involved in automotive a b e k
industry.

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Vehicle Development
9
Projects
An Overview-Categories of vehicle
1. 1 C 1 1
development projects
Platforms and model lines, Product
2. evolution process (PEP), Vehicle 1 C 1 1
project management
Aspects of international development
3. projects. Cars that topped and cars 1 C 1 1
that flopped
Factors of success in the automotive
4. 1 C 1 1
industry

180 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Phases of the product evolution
5. process - Initial phase, Concept 2 C 1 1
phase
6. Series development phase 2 C 1 1,2
Series supportand Further
7. 1 C 1 1
development.
Unit - II Virtual Car Process 9
Building virtual cars – Purpose and
8. 1 C 2 1
benefits, specifications
Geometric integration, Functional
9. 2 C 2 1,2
geometry evaluation
10. Virtual build groups. 1 C 2 1,2
Automotive Electrical and Electronics
11. 2 C 2 1,2
system development
Systems engineering , Requirements
12. 1 C 2 1
engineering
System Architecture and Design,
13. 2 C 1,2 1,2
System Integration and Validation
Unit - III Management Processes for
9
Complete Vehicle Development
Target management – Complete
14. 1 C 3 1
vehicle requirements
15. Target Agreement , Sign -off process 2 C 3 1
16. Design problem management 1 C 3 1
17. Release and Design changes 1 C 3 1,2
Change management – Engineering
18. 2 C 3 2
Change request
Quality management systems, Pre-
19. delivery and post-delivery Quality 2 C 3 1
Assessment
Unit - IV customer relevant
9
complete vehicle characteristics
Registrability –Legal and customer
20. requirements, system design, 1 C 4 1
integration and validation

181 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Total vehicle costs, Legal and
customer requirements, system
design, integration and validation
21. 2 c 4 1
Design appeal - Legal and customer
requirements, system design,
integration and validation
Cabin comfort-Riding, Acoustic,
22. 2 C 4 1
Thermal,
Infotainment- Legal and customer
23. requirements, system design, 1 C 4 1
integration and validation
Agility - Legal and customer
requirements, system design,
integration and validation,Passive
24. 2 c 4 1
safety - Legal and customer
requirements, system design,
integration and validation
Theft deterrence- Legal and customer
25. requirements, system design, 1 c 4 1
integration and validation
Unit – V Secondary Complete
9
Vehicle Characteristics
Production Integration - Legal and
26. 1 C 5 1
internal Customer requirements
Production Integration-Components
27. 2 C 5 1
and system design
Production Integration- System
28. 2 C 5 1
integration and validation
Service Integration- Legal and internal
29. 1 C 5 1
Customer requirements
Service Integration-Components and
30. 2 C 5 1
system design
Service Integration- System
31. 1 C 5 1
integration and validation
Total contact hours 45

182 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. No. TEXT BOOKS
1. Weber Julian, “Automotive Development Processes", Springer, 2009.
2. Daniel Sörensen, "The Automotive Development Process", Springer, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. Tony Lewin, Ryan Borroff, “How to Design Cars Like a Pro”, Motor Books
International, 2010.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15AE451E Intelligent Vehicle Technology
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Vehicular Electronics And Control
elective Technology
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

To understand the advanced vision system in vehicles, Autonomous

PURPOSE
vehicles and Intelligent Transportation System
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the intelligent vision system used in
a c
automobiles
2. Understand the architecture of intelligent
a d
transportation system
3. Understand adaptive control techniques of an
a d k
autonomous vehicle
4. Understand about the successful autonomous vehicle
a d
projects

183 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Introduction to Intelligent Vision 9
System
1. Vision Based Driver Assistance System – 2 C 1 1
Vehicle optical Sensor, Laser Radar
2. Non Contact ground velocity detecting 2 C 1 1
Sensor, Road Surface Recognition Sensor
3. Vehicle Sensors for Electronic Toll 1 C,D 1 1
Collection System
4. Components of a Vision Sensor System , 2 C 1 1
Driver Assistance on Highways –Lane
Recognition, Traffic Sign Recognition
5. Driver Assistance in Urban Traffic-Stereo 2 C 1 1
Vision, Shape base analysis and
Pedestrian Recognition
Unit - II Vehicle Information System and 8
Intelligent Transportation
6. Intelligent Transportation System (ITS) – 1 C 2 1
Vision for ITS Communications
7. Multimedia communication in a car – 1 C 2 1,2
Current ITS Communication Systems and
Services
8. Vehicle to Vehicle and Road to Vehicle 2 C,D 2 1
Communication Systems
9. Inter and Intra Vehicle Communication 1 C,D 2 1
10. VANETS-Devices-Optical Technologies 3 C 2 1
and Millimeter Wave technologies
Unit - III Adaptive Control Techniques 8
for Intelligent Vehicles
11. Automatic Control Of Highway Traffic And 1 C 3 1
Moving Vehicles
12. Adaptive Control Of Highway Traffic And 1 C 3 1
Moving Vehicles
13. Adaptive Control –Gain Scheduling 1 C,D 3 1
14. Model Reference Adaptive Control 1 C 3 1
15. Self Tuning Adaptive Control System Model 2 C,D 3 1
- System Identification Basics, Recursive
Parameter Estimation, Estimator
Initialization

184 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
16. Design Of Self-Tuning Controllers – 2 C,D 3 1
Generalized Minimum Variance (GMV)
Control, Pole Placement Control And Model
Predictive Control.
Unit - IV Decisional Architechtures for 8
Autonomous Vehicles
17. Control Architectures And Motion 2 C,D 3 1,3
Autonomy –Deliberative Architectures,
Reactive Architectures, Hybrid
Architectures.
18. Overview Of Sharp Architecture, Models Of 1 C,D 3 1,3
Vehicles
19. Concepts Of Sensor Based Maneuver, 2 C,D 3 1,3
Reactive Trajectory Following, Parallel
Parking, Platooning
20. Main Approaches To Trajectory Planning, 3 C,D 3 1,3
Non-Holonomic Path Planning.
Unit - V Autonomous Vehicle and Case 8
Studies
21. DARPA Challenge Case Study 1 C 4 1,3
22. ARGO Prototype Vehicle 1 C 4 1,3
23. The Gold System-The inverse Perspective 2 C 4 1
Mapping ,Lane Detection, Obstacle
Detection, Vehicle Detection, Pedestrian
Detection.
24. Software systems architecture, 1 C 4 1
Computational Performances.
25. ARGO Prototype vehicle Hardware – 3 C 4 1,3
Functionalities, Data acquisition System,
Processing System and Control System
26. Cycle test-I 1
27. Cycle test-II 2
28. Surprise test 1
Total contact hours 45

185 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Ljubo Vlacic, Michel Parent and Fumio Harashima,“Intelligent Vehicle
Technologies”, Butterworth-Heinemann publications, Oxford, 2001-ISBN 0
7506 5093 1
2. Ronald K Jurgen, “Automotive Electronics Handbook ”, Automotive Electronics
Series, SAE, USA, 1998.
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. Nicu Bizon,Lucian D Ascalescu And Naser Mahdavit Abatabaei “Autonomous
Vehicles Intelligent Transport Systems And Smart Technologies”,Nova
Publishers-2014–ISBN-978-1-63321-326-5

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In- Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise Quiz Total
semester tool test I test II III Test
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15AE452E Model Based System Design
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15AE251E
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category Professional Vehicular Electronics and Control
P
Elective Technology
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

To understand the Concepts and implementation of model based

PURPOSE
system design
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the concept of V-development
a b d e k
approach in automotive controller design
2. Understand the various modeling techniques used
a b e k
in model based system design
3. Understand the architecture of ECU and Rapid a b e k
186 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 prototyping Hardware
4. Understand the concept of real time simulation
a b d e k
and HIL simulation through a case study

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Model Based Design Approach 9
1. Introduction to model based design 1 C 1 1
2. Introduction to the design process, 2 C 1 1
validation verification and requirements,
Design and verification process
3. Model based system design in Functional 2 C 1 1
level, Architectural level, Implementation
level.
4. Keys and barriers to adoption of model 1 C 1 1
based engineering
5. V-development approach in automotive 3 C 1 1
domain (Rapid control prototyping -MIL, SIL,
PIL, HIL).
Unit - II Modeling Techniques 9
6. Introduction to graphical modeling 1 C 2 1
7. Signal flow modeling, state machines 2 C,D 2 1
modeling
8. Algorithmic models, Transfer function 1 C,D 2 1
modeling
9. State space modeling, Event based 2 C,D 2 1
modeling
10. Statistical modeling for system identification 1 C 2 1
11. Mathematical modeling for automotive 1 C,D 2 1
applications
12. Simple Motor model and generator model 1 C,D 2 1
development.
Unit - III Ecu Architecture and Design 9
13. Rapid Prototyping hardware architecture 1 C 3 3
and features
14. Programming analog , digital interface 2 C 3 3
,Protocol interface and implementing
controller
15. ECU Design - Need for ECUs, Advances in 1 C 3 3
ECUs for automotives

187 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
16. Design complexities of ECU, Design 1 C 3 3
requirements of ECU design
17. Selection of sensors and interfaces for ECU 1 C 3 3
design
18. ECU Hardware -Architecture of an 1 C 3 3
advanced microcontroller used in the design
of automobile ECUs
19. On Chip peripherals, protocol interfaces and 2 C 3 3
GPIO
Unit - IV Realtime Simulation 9
20. Plant and Controller stand alone simulation 1 C,D 4 3
21. Plant and controller implementation on 1 C,D 4 3
single target
22. RT simulation by Separating the plant from 1 C,D 4 3
the controller
23. Controller and plant on real time target 1 C,D 4 3
24. V and V using HIL RT Model 2 C,D 1,4 3
25. Implementation of communication 2 C,D 4 3
interfaces, A/D Outputs
26. Verifying timing requirements of Control 1 C,D 4 3
algorithm
Unit - V Model Based System Design and 9
Case Study
27. Modeling a series hybrid electric vehicle – 2 C,D 4 2,3
simulink and sim driveline
28. Models for driver, battery and Electric 2 C,D 4 3
motors –creating and running drive cycles
29. Models for Engine 2 C,D 4 3
30. Developing Hybrid vehicle Model 2 C,D 4 3
31. Supervisory logic implementation and HIL 1 C,D 4 3
simulation of Hybrid vehicle.
32. Cycle test-I 1
33. Cycle test-II 2
34. Surprise Test 1
Total contact hours 45

188 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Peter Wilson and H.Alan Mantooth “Model based Engineering for complex
Electronics system” 2013,Newness
2. AgamKumar Tyagi “Matlab and simulink for Engineers” Oxford Higher
education,2012
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. Webcourse by Zachariah chambers and Marc Herniter –Rose Hulman institute
of technology on “Introduction to model based design and Advanced model
based design.”
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In- Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise Quiz Total
semester tool test I test II III Test
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
L T P C
15AE453E Vehicle Stability and Control Systems
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15AE251E
Data Book / NIL
Codes/Standards
Course Category Professional Vehicular Electronics and Control
P
Elective Technology
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017
To understand the importance and use control theory concepts for
PURPOSE
vehicle stability.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
Understand the concepts of vehicle stability and
1. a b c d e k
fundamentals of vehicle dynamics.
Understand the concepts of Vehicle, Road and driver
2. a b d e k
modeling.
Understand the concepts longitudinal and Lateral
3. a b d e k
stability control
Understand the concepts of vertical and ride stability
4. a b d k
control
189 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Introduction to Vehicle Stability 9
1. Introduction to stability of motion – Concept 1 C 1 1
and analysis
2. Static and Dynamic stability, Mathematical 1 C,D 1 1
forms for vehicle dynamic equations.
3. Computing Eigen values and Routh’s 2 C,D 1 1
stability criterion
4. Co-ordinates and notation of vehicle 1 C,D 1 2
dynamics model
5. Longitudinal vehicle motion –During 1 C,D 3 2
acceleration, Braking
6. Vertical vehicle motion – one DOF quarter 1 C,D 4 2,3
car model
7. Lateral vehicle motion –Bicycle model in 2 C,D 3 2,3
steady state cornering
Unit -II Vehicle, Road and Driver Modeling 8
8. Introduction to Vehicle Modeling 1 C 2 3,4
9. Wheel Model – Wheel and ground point 1 C,D 2 4
velocities, Wheel slip and tire side slip angle.
10. Friction coefficient and forces calculation, 1 C,D 2 4
11. Tire characteristics and wheel radius 1 C,D 2 4
12. Complete vehicle model – Chassis translator 1 C,D 2 4
y motion, Chassis rotational motion
13. Reduced two track non-linear model 1 C,D ,2 4
14. Road Model – Requirement of road model, 1 C,D 4
course path, Road surface and Wind
Strength
15. Human factors in driver automation ,PID 1 C,D 2 3,4
driver Model
Unit - III Longitudinal Dynamics and 8
Control
16. Introduction to longitudinal control – ACC, 1 C,D 3 1
Collision avoidance, Automated Highway
systems
17. Cruise controller design, PI Controller for 1 C,D 3 1,2
first order plant
18. PID Cruise-controller design for second 1 C,D 3 1
order actuator
190 B.Tech Automobile Engg.
(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
19. Autonomous cruise control –Speed and 1 C 3 1,2
Headway control
20. Adaptive cruise control –Cruise control with 1 C,D 3 2
preview based on onsite information
21. Vehicle Platooning and string stability 1 C
22. ACC –Autonomous control with constant 1 C,D 3 1
spacing
23. ACC – Autonomous control with constant 1 C,D 1,3 1
time gap policy and String stability of CTG
spacing Policy
Unit -IV Lateral Dynamics and Control 8
24. Steering control for automated lane keeping 1 C,D 3 1,2
– Bicycle model and state feedback
25. Steady state error from dynamic equation 1 C,D 3 1
26. Unity feedback loop system 1 C,D 3 1,2
27. Loop analysis with a proportional controller 1 C,D 3 3
28. Loop analysis with a lead compensator 1 C,D 3 3
29. Simulation of performance with Lead 1 C,D 3 3
compensator
30. Four wheel steering –Goals of four wheel 1 C,D 3 2
steering
31. Yaw rate and acceleration response, Lane 1 C,D 3 2
Change Maneuver – 2WS VS 4WS
Unit - V Vertical Dynamics and Control 8
32. Introduction to Automotive Suspension – 1 C 4 3
Passive suspension ,Active suspension -
Trade offs and Limitation
33. Performance variable of quarter car 1 C,D 4 3
suspension
34. Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes for 1 C,D 4 3
the Quarter Car
35. Approximate Transfer Functions Using 1 C,D 4 3
Decoupling
36. Verification Using the Complete Quarter 1 C,D 4 3
Model
37. Optimal active Suspension with 2DOF 1 C,D 4 2,3
model
38. LQR formulation for active suspension 1 C,D 4 3

191 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
design
39. Performance studies of the LQR controller, 1 C,D 4 3
Conclusions on Achievable Active System
Performance
40. Cycle test-I 1
41. Cycle test-II 2
42. Surprise test 1
Total contact hours 45
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl. TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Dean Karnopp “Vehicle Stability” ,4th edition Marcel Dekker 2004
2. A.Galip Ulsoy,Heui Peng,Melih “Automotive Control system” ,Cambridge University Press
2012
3. Rajesh Rajamani “Vehicle Dynamics and Control” Springer 2006
4. Uwe,Lars Nielsen “Automotive Control System for Engine driveline and vehicle” 2nd
edition ,Springer 2005
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
5. Richard.C.Dorf and Robert.H.Bishop, “Modern Control System” 12th edition Pearson
Prentice Hall,2013.
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In- Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Test Surprise Quiz Total
semester tool test I test II III Test
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

192 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 L T P C
15AE454E Nonlinear Systems
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: 15AE406
Prerequisite: 15AE209
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P ELECTIVE Automotive Electronics
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

To impart the overall knowledge about the nonlinear systems and

PURPOSE
control schemes adapted to handle the nonlinear behavior
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Get familiarized with nonlinear behavior involved in
a b c d e
the physical system
2. Asses the local stability of a nonlinear system a b d e
3. Compute and analyze a describing function for a
a d d e
nonlinear system
4. Design and solve nonlinear control problems using
a b c e
sliding control schemes
5. Acquire the knowledge about adaptive control
a b d e
mechanism and its robustness

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Nonlinear System Analysis 9
Nonlinear system behavior and Non linear C
1. 1 1 1
control
Phase plane analysis –Phase portraits, C,D
2. singular points, symmetry in phase plane 1 1 1
portraits
3. Constructing Phase portraits 2 C,D 1 1
4. Determining time from phase portraits 1 C,D 1 2
5. Phase plane analysis of linear system 1 C,D 1 2
6. Phase plane analysis of non linear system 1 C,D 1 2,3
7. Existence of limit cycle 2 C,D 1 2,3
Unit - II Fundmentals of Lyapunov Theory 9

193 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Nonlinear system and Equilibrium points,
8. 1 2 3,4
concepts of stability C
9. Linearization and Local stability 1 C,D 2 4
Lyapunov’s direct method –Positive definite C,D
10. 1 2 4
functions
System analysis based on lyapunov’s direct C,D
11. 3 2 4
method –Analysis of LTI System
Control design based on Lyapunov’s direct C,D
12. 2 2 4
method
Lyapunov analysis of Non-autonomous C,D
13. 1 2 4
system
Unit - III Describing Function Analysis 9
Describing function fundamentals –Basic C,D
14. assumption, definition and computing 1 3 1
describing function
15. Common nonlinearities in control system 3 C,D 3 1,2
Describing functions of common C,D,I
16. 1 3 1
nonlinearities
Describing function analysis of nonlinear C
17. 1 3 1,2
systems –Nyquist criterion and its extension
Existence of limit cycle, stability of limit cycle C,D
18. 3 3 2
and reliability of describing function
Unit - IV Nonlinear Control Design –
9
Sliding Control
Feedback linearization and the canonical C,D
19. form –Input state and Input output 2 4 1,2
linearization
20. Multi input system 2 C,D 4 1
21. Sliding variables 2 C,D 4 1,2
Sliding surface –implementation of switching C,D
22. 1 4 3
control laws
Continuous approximations of switching C,D
23. 1 4 3
control laws
24. Modelling /Performance trade off’s 1 C,D 4 3
Unit - V Adaptive Control 9
Basic concepts of adaptive control – C
25. 1 5 3
Introduction to design of adaptive control
26. Adaptive control of first order system 1 C,D 5 3

194 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Adaptive control of linear system with full C,D
27. 1 5 3
state feedback
Adaptive control of linear systems with C,D
28. 1 5 3
output feedback
29. Adaptive control of nonlinear systems 2 C,D 5 3
30. Robustness of adaptive control systems 2 C,D 5 2,3
31. Methods for linear parameter estimation 1 C,D 5 3
Total contact hours 45

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Jean-Jacques Slotine Weiping Li “Applied Nonlinear Control” 1991,Prentice
Hall Pvt.Ltd.
2. M. Vidyasagar “Nonlinear systems analysis”1993,Prentice Hall Englewood
cliffs,New Jersey
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. 1 Hassan.K.Khalil “Nonlinear Control”,2015 ,Pearson Education Ltd.
.

Course nature Theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

L T P C
15AE455E Engineering Optimization
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: 15AE406
Prerequisite: 15AE209
Data Book /
Codes/Standards
Course Category P PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE Automotive Electronics
Course designed by Department of Automobile Engineering
Approval -- 36th Academic Council Meeting -- , 2017

195 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 To learn the use of classical optimization techniques and to formulate
PURPOSE
,solve optimization problem for engineering applications
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Acquire the fundamentals of Engineering
a b c d e k
optimization problems
2. Get familiarize with the classical optimization
a d e k
techniques
3. Solve Linear programming based optimization
a b d e k
problems
4. Formulate constrained nonlinear programming
a b d k
problems
5. Understand the computational procedure of
a b e k
dynamic programming

Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Unit - I Introduction to
9
Optimization
Engineering applications of
1. 1 C 1 1
optimization
Statement of an optimization problem
–Design Constraint, Constraint
2. 3 C,D 1 1
surface, Objective function and its
surface
Classification of Optimization
problems –Based on Constraints,
Nature of Design, Physical structure,
3. 3 C,D 1 1
Permissable values of the variables,
Deterministic nature of the variables,
Number of objective function
4. Engineering Optimization example 2 C,D 1 2
Unit - II Classical Optimization
9
Techniques
5. Classical Optimization Techniques 1 C 2 1,2
Single variable optimization,
6. Multivariable optimization with no 1 C,D 2 1
constraints
7. Optimization with equality constraints 2 C,D 2 1

196 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Optimization with inequality
8. constraints –Kuhn Tucker Conditions, 3 C,D 2 1
Constraint Qualification
9. Convex Programming Problem 2 C,D 2 1
Unit - III Linear Programming 9
Application of Linear Programming,
10. Standard form and geometry of linear 1 C,D 3 1
programming
Simplex algorithm –Identifying an
11. 2 C,D 3 1,2
optimal point
12. Two phases of the simplex method 1 C,D 3 1
13. Duality in Linear Programming 1 C 3 1,2
Decompostion Principle and
14. 2 C,D 3 1
sensitivity analysis
15. Revised and dual simplex methods 1 C,D 1
Karmarkar’s Interior Method and
16. introduction to quadratic 1 C,D 1
programming
Unit - IV Nonlinear Programming 9
Introduction to Nonlinear
17. 1 C,D 4 1,2
programming –Unimodal function
Elimination Methods and comparison
18. 2 C,D 4 1
of various elimination methods
19. Interpolation Methods 2 C,D 4 1,2
Unconstrained optimization with
20. 2 C,D 4 1
multivariables
Constrained Optimization –Direct
21. 1 C,D 4 1
Methods
Constrained Optimization –Indirect
22. 1 C,D 4 1
Methods
Unit - V Dynamic Programming 9
Introduction to Dynamic
23. 1 C 5 1
Programming
24. Multistage Decision Processes 1 C,D 5 1
Concept of Suboptimization and
25. 1 C,D 5 1
principle of optimality
Computational Procedure in Dynamic
26. 1 C,D 5 1
Programming

197 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)
 Contact C-D-
Session Description of Topic IOs Reference
hours I-O
Example –Calculus method of
27. 2 C,D 5 1
solution
28. Example Tabular method of solution 2 C,D 5 1
29. Continuous dynamic Programming 1 C,D 5 1
Total contact hours 45

LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
TEXT BOOKS
No.
1. Singiresu S. Rao” Engineering Optimization - Theory and Practice” -4th edition
,2011 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Kalyanmoy Deb “OPTIMIZATION FOR ENGINEERING DESIGN: Algorithms
and Examples “- 2nd edition 2012 Prentice Hall Pvt.Ltd
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. Taha H. A., "Operations Research: An Introduction", MacMillan Pub Co., NY,
9th Edition (Reprint) (2013)

Course nature Theory

sAssessment Method (Weightage 100%)
Assessment Cycle Cycle Cycle Surprise
In- Quiz Total
tool test I test II Test III Test
semester
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%

198 B.Tech Automobile Engg.

(Splz.in Automotive Electronics)